Download PDF Original Colour - University of Toronto

00
oo
S
00
o
o
OTTOMAN -TURKISH LANGUAGE
J.
W. REDHOUSE
-
v_S3w~
'
AJ
r
TRUBNER'S COLLECTION
or
SIMPLIFIED
GRAMMARS
OF THE PRINCIPAL
ASIATIC
AND EUROPEAN LANGUAGES.
EDITED BT
RELNHOLD ROST,
LL.D., PH.D.
IX.
OTTOMAN TUKKISH.
BY
J.
W. REDHOUSE.
TRUBNER'S COLLECTION OF SIMPLIFIED GRAMMARS OF THE
PRINCIPAL ASIATIC AND EUROPEAN LANGUAGES.
EDITED BY REINHOLD ROST,
LL.D., Pn.D.
V.
MODERN GREEK.
HINDUSTANI, PERSIAN,
AND ARABIC.
BY THE
BY
E.
LATE
M. GELDAET, M.A.
Price 2s. Qd.
E. H. PALMER, M.A.
Price
VI.
ROUMANIAN.
5s.
BY
R. TOECEANTJ.
II.
Price
5s.
HUNGARIAN.
BY
VII.
I.
SlNGEE.
Price
TIBETAN.
4s. 6d.
BY H.
A. JASCHKE.
Price
5s.
III.
VIII.
BASQUE.
BY W. VAN EYS.
Price
3s.
DANISH.
BY
6d.
E. C. OTTE.
Price
IV.
IX.
MALAGASY.
BY
G.
OTTOMAN TURKISH.
W. PABKEE.
Price
3s. 6d.
BY
J.
W. REDHOUSE.
Price 10s. 6d.
5s.
Grammars of the following
are in preparation
:
Albanese, Anglo-Saxon, Assyrian, Bohemian, Bulgarian, Burmese,
Chinese, Cymric and Gaelic, Dutch, Egyptian, Finnish, Hebrew,
Kurdish, Malay, Pali, Polish, Russian, Sanskrit, Serbian, Siamese,
Singhalese, Swedish, &c., &c., &c.
LONDON:
TRUBNER &
CO.,
LUDGATE HILL.
A
GRAMMAR
SIMPLIFIED
OP THE
OTTOMAN-TUEKISH LANGUAGE.
BY
J.
W. REDHOUSE,
HON. MBMBEB OB THB
LONDON
TRUBNEK &
M.K.A.S.,
BOYAL BOCIBTT OP
CO.,
LITEBATUBE
:
LUDGATE
1884.
[All rights reserved.]
PULL.
SEEN BY
PREi
DATE
JAN
2
LONDON
BT.
:
GILBEET AND EIVINOTON, LIMITED,
JOHN'S SQUARE, CLEEKENWELL EOAD.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
Preface
.
.
.
.
Note on Identity of Alphabets
ix
xii
CHAPTER
I.
LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
SECTION
I.
Number, Order, Forms, and Names of
Letters
......
Greek, and
Synopsis of Arabic,
Latin
4
Letters
II.
1
Phonetic Values of Letters, Vowel-Points,
Orthographic
Signs,
Ottoman Euphony
Transliteration,
CHAPTER
.
.
.
.
15
II.
OTTOMAN ACCIDENCE.
SECTION
I.
II.
III.
Nouns Substantive
Nouns Adjective
Numerals
IV. Pronouns
51
......
.
.
.
.
68
74
82
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
vi
PAGE
SECTION V. Demonstratives
VI. Interrogatives
,,
.
.
VII. Relative Pronouns
.
...
VIII. Derivation of Verbs
(Table)
IX. Conjugation of Verbs
Participles
X.
;
.90
Verbal Nouns
Numbers and Persons
XI. Complex Categories of Verbs
Tenses
;
Gerunds
;
.
XII. First Complex Category
94
.
Moods
;
92
.
.
;
.
99
.
115
.119
.
120
.
XIII. Second
125
.
129
XIV. Third
XV. Combined
(Turkish) Conjugation
XVI. Negative and
XVII. Dubitative,
.
Impotential Conjugations
Potential,
and Facile Verbs
.
133
.
135
.
141
144
XVIII. Verb Substantive
XIX. Verbs of Presence and
Absence, Existence
....
and Non-Existence
XX. Compound
,,
XXI.
148
Verbs
Interrogative Verbs
;
Interrogation
XXII. Adverbial Expressions
XXIII. Prepositions
XXIV.
Conjunctions
XXV.
Interjections
....
....
.
147
.
.
.
151
.
154
.150
.
.
156
.157
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
CHAPTER
THE OTTOMAN
VU
III.
SYNTAX.
PAGE
SECTION
I.
Conversational
brevity.
Precision
in
ERRATA.
PAGE
PREFACE.
THE Ottoman
Language,
A*.jjLJl2-c
osmanlija,
is
the most
highly polished branch of the great Turkish tongue, which
is
spoken, with dialectic variations, across the whole breadth,
of
nearly,
the
impinging into
also,
in
middle
region
Europe,
of
the continent
even, in the
Southern Russia,
up
to
of
Asia,
Ottoman provinces, and
the
frontiers
of the
old
kingdom of Poland.
The Ottoman language
fundamentally Turkish.
tinues
more and more
in its
is,
grammar and vocabulary,
It has, however, adopted,
and con-
to adopt, as required, a vast
of Arabic, Persian, and foreign words
number
(Greek, Armenian,
Slavonic, Hungarian, Italian, French, English, &c.),
together
with the use of a few of the grammatical rules of the Arabic
and Persian, which are given as Turkish rules
in the following
pages, their origin being in each case specified.
x
The
J
c
great Turkish language, AS J turkje,
Ottoman, has been
classed,
by European writers as one of the
"
"
agglutinative
languages
Ottoman and non-
;
not inflecting
its
words,
but
X
"
PREFACE.
"
which were once
in-
dependent words," to the root- words, and thus forming
all
as
glueing on,"
it
were, particles,
the grammatical and derivative desinences in use.
To my
mind, this term "agglutinative" and
its
definition,
are inapplicable to the Turkish language in general, and to
the Ottoman Turkish in
and most
particular.
truly, inflexional tongues
;
These
are, essentially
none of their inflexions
ever having been " independent words," but modifying particles only.
The
the Turkish languages, or
distinctive character of all
dialects,
is
that the root of a whole family,
of inflexions and derivations,
is
however numerous,
always recognizable at sight,
seldom suffering any modification whatever, and always standing at the head of the inflexions or derivations, however
complex in character these may
of a root-word does take place,
it
When
be.
is
a modification
always of the simplest
kind, always the softening of a hard or sharp consonant into
the corresponding more liquid letter, and always of the final
consonant only of the root.
becomes a
i,
soft Persian
which
is
a
t*J,
becomes a
or the
L>
sometimes
c,
a sharp Arabic
e)
becomes a
Ottoman modification of
this
latter,
then pronounced like our most useful consonant
or, in case of a
nounced
jj
or
Thus, a c^
like
dominant
o or
our consonant w.
u vowel
in
the root,
is
y,
pro-
XI
PREFACE.
The Ottoman Turkish has more vowel-sounds
known
number) than any other tongue
these
may have
present treatise, though
differentiation in the
The
word
each of
is
it
make
Every one of these
all.
is
in the transliterations of the
mark
distinguished by a special
is
As
to me.
a short and a long modification, they
in
twenty-two possible vowels
language
(eleven in
such
impossible to attempt any
Arabic characters to which the Ottoman
wedded.
of every
euphony regulate the pronunciation
the Ottoman language perfectly, in all of Turkish
rules of
in
origin;
;
and as
far as
is
practicable,
in
what
is
radically
foreign.
Although a compound word
the Turkish dialects, and
the
is
a thing totally
unknown
to
of very rare occurrence in Arabic,
Ottoman language abounds with such, adopted from the
Aryan, compounding Persian.
Persian grammarians and writers
into a harmonious
further,
conflicting
learnt
how
to
mould
whole the incongruous Aryan Persian and
Semitic Arabic elements.
step
first
and blended
Ottoman ingenuity has gone a
in
one noble speech the three
elements of the Aryan,
Semitic and
Turanian
classes of vocables.
Fault
is
found by some with this intermixture of idioms
;
xii
PREFACE.
but an Englishman, of
all
the world, will
ciate a clever mosaic of diction
;
and a
know how
real
to appre-
student of the
language will learn to admire many a true beauty,
resulting
from a masterly
handling of the materials at his command,
by any
first-rate
Ottoman
literary celebrity,
whether prose-
writer or poet
NOTE.
The manuscript
before Christmas, 1882,
in the
hands
of a
of the present sketch
and copies
few friends
of
Grammar was
my table of identic
completed
alphabets have been
for the last four or five
years.
I
have just
had the pleasure and privilege of
reading the admirable and exhaustive
treatise on " The Alphabet,"
by the Rev. Isaac Taylor, and am rejoiced to
find that he has come to the same conclusion as
to the
of the
identity
three
probably at an earlier date than the time, perhaps
twenty years ago,
when the idea began to force itself on
my mind. I still feel inclined'
to
hold
however,
by the inference that the Phenicians gave the
alphabet
to Italy, quite
independently of the Greek action which later on
doubtlessly
;
influenced the Italian culture.
LONDON,
September, 1883.
J.W.R.
OTTOMAN TURKISH GEAMMAE.
CHAPTER
I.
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
SECTION
The Number, Order, Foi*ms, and Names of
I.
the
Letters.
THERE
are thirty-one distinct letters used
Some of
language.
^ or
is
V,
letter,
these have more than one value
also a combination of
two
letters into
which Arabian piety has agreed
la,
Thirty-two
ellf,
v
be,
^ dal, i zel,
^
tl,
k
zi,
c
j
the
v pe, o
ri,
'ayn,
nAn, j w6v,
The
and
one character,
to count as a
letters have, therefore, to
be named and enumerated, as follows
L
;
and which Persian and Turkish conformity has had no
option but to adopt.
I
Ottoman
them are sometimes consonants, sometimes vowels.
four of
There
the
in
5
foregoing
te,
&
j ze, j zhe,
c gayn, _i
:
se,
^ jlm, ^ chlm, c ha,
^
sin,
fe,
j
^i shin,
qaf,
d
^
kaf,
J
s&d,
lam,
^khi,
^
.,
dad,
mlm,
he, V lam-ellf, <j ye.
is
the ordinary arrangement of the letters of
Ottoman alphabet,
as learnt
and repeated by children
;
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
2
excepting that they are not at
know, either of the three Persian
j
which are not contained
zhe,
and
It
in the
chlm, and
Arabic alphabet, their
and unpronounceable
to,
called the ellf-be,
is
-
letters, uj pe,
sounds and values being unknown
by, an Arab.
taught to mention, or to
first
<u c_aS1
,
the alphabet;
i.e.,
might be conveniently styled the alphabet by forms;
it
letters of the
same form being brought together
in
it,
more
or less.
There
is
another very different order necessary to be learnt
of the twenty-nine Arabic
and
called ebjed, jg\,
is
arranged in eight conventional words, as follows
is
jjgl ebjed,
j^a hevwaz, jit huttl,
<o-^S qarashat, j
The
It
letters.
letters
sakhaz,
Jj&
}liki dazagila.
order represent the nine units,
1
for the tens, also in order, 10 to
to
90
the hundreds, serially, 100 to 900
c
,
stands for 1000;
enumerated, has no value of
of the values of
its
Hebrew
The
9
The
;
;
to
nine in
the third nine count as
the twenty-eighth in the
and the
its
first
this
the second nine stand
;
V, though always
last,
own, but counts as the sum
two components, J
This system appears
times indeed.
sa'fas,
of the Arabic alphabet, as arranged in
ebjed series, have each a numerical value.
series,
^^
keleman,
:
have been
30,
in
1
;
i.
e.,
as 31.
use in very early
order of the letters in
alphabet, as far as this goes
1;
that
it
is,
is
that of the
as far as the
end of the sixth word qarashat, 0^9, with which the Hebrew
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
The
terminates.
alphabet
now
(omitting
all
of the two last words
letters
of
consideration
the
Semitic inventions of a comparatively
by means of
modifications,
represented in the
from
o,
is
c from c
i
,
alphabet.
from
^
j,
This may be called
.
A circumstance
factitious
modern
V)
are
and are
date,
dots, of letters, undotted or dotted,
Hebrew
from
6
the
Thus,
is
ii>
modified
from ^0, U from k, and
numeral alphabet.
that invests this ebjed arrangement with a
European antiquarian interest of the very highest order,
the
fact
that
proves, beyond the remotest
it
is
shadow of a
doubt, the unity of origin of the Semitic (usually taken to
be Phenician, but I imagine
it
to
be
much more
ancient than
Moses, or even Abraham), the Greek, and the Latin alphabets.
now
Not only can
the
in the series
be traced through successive modifications back
to
divergent forms of each separate letter
one ancient Phenician character, but the order of the
whole
series
from
1
to
o
is
absolutely
identical
in
the
Arabic (Hebrew, Phenician), Greek, and Latin alphabets,
as
the following synopsis shows.
An
additional
proof
is
furnished by the identity of the numeral values of the letters
in the
Arabic and Greek alphabets,
known
to the Latins,
a method
who must have had
totally un-
a method of their
own, probably Etruscan, before they received their alphabet
direct from the Phenicians, quite independently of the Greeks,
and quite as
early.
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
irabic
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
The
r,
,
5
G, must originally have been a hard
modern Egyptian,
Hebrew, and
as in
in Greek,
sound of our English j or
hardened
The
it,
K
apparently, into a
remark
serious
first
made by both
the change
soft
is
it
In
so pro-
is
it
nounced, though the rest of Arabia has softened
g.
into the
and though the Latins
g,
value.
called for on our
coming
to
the Greeks and the Latins of the
Semitic soft aspirate consonant
vowel E.
into their
s
It
would almost seem as though the old Phenicians used that
letter as a final vowel, exactly as
and Turks
explicable
is
the
A
at present.
to
is
done by the Persians
more remarkable divergency,
in-
me, but parallel to the foregoing conversion,
change made by the Greeks of the Semitic hard
aspirate consonant
_,
into their long vowel H,
t],
whereas the
Latins preserved the letter as a consonant and as their sole
aspirate,
under the same written form as that used by the
Greeks, H,
of the
h,
and which was
in reality the
Phenician form
letter.
The next remark
as to the Latin F,
is
which the Greeks
long ago discarded from their alphabet, after having in the
first
instance adopted
to represent the
it
in
numeral
use
it
corrupted, cursive form,
<s-,
they
continued
to
Phenician form T, and used
its
After discarding
6.
as
to
a
O
name of
modification of
sound, from a
its
still,
it
as a letter,
numeral, though with
which they
give the Phenician
it
a
to this day,
'
Bau, j\j
w
waw,
vav.
The
or v to an /,
is
Latin
of no
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
6
The Arabs
importance.
sound
having no v
of to-day,
letter or
name of Her Majesty the
in their language, write the
Queen-Empress, Fiktoriya.
As
Greek phonetic value of Z exactly corresponds
the
the Semitic
power of
\
their
,
G
and the form of the Latin
one
is
is
was
soft g,
some
that in
where a
soft
g
our
dialects
j perhaps even our
t
of Italian a z
The
Semitic
a long vowel,
i,
^
it
into their
\>
its
it
the Latins,
letter.
We now
Three western
into the
vowel
consonantal use also as an
and also
y,
it
is
letters,
:,
But the
i.
initial
;
though
a consonant in that
use a y to express that value
Germans have adopted the Latin
Semitic
;
followed, as a matter of course, that both
they forgot, or never realized, that
position.
Certain
z.
used in words
being both a consonant, like our
Greeks and Latins should make
Latins preserved
is
found in other dialects.
is
having no such sound, discarded the
but the
;
modification j to represent
j, y,
are
now used
for the
one
(j.
The next
four letters require no
y* of the eastern Arabs
S.
identical,
being merely a modification,
The Greeks made the Semitic
it.
to
tempted to imagine that originally the Latin power
of this letter
it
numeral value being
The Hebrew
alphabet,
is
is
letter
comment
but the Semitic
;
not a good parallel for the Greek
D,
that
holds
the equivalent of the Arabic
Arabs of Morocco transpose the
^
its
place
in
the
and the western
<_,<?,
and
^
in
their
jsfil
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
making the
alphabet,
word
fifth
Hebrew
the exact equivalent of the
^
The
the
is
I should be inclined to suggest that
was formed, the Semitic
^
S
^
t
(
&
whichever
it
name Xerxes, of
The
Latins dropped
really was.
conversion of Semitic consonantal c into Greek and
Latin vowel o
is
This
not unnatural.
letter
c
unpronounceable by any other than a Semitic.
of convulsion in the throat
serving likewise as
soft guttural, of
What
a,
is
the hard parallel
Even
write and pronounce
is
it
as a
j
,
is
in
,
which
It
;
is
the
and an
o
read in Hebrew, as in
the Arabians,
when they have
which they cannot pronounce,
b,
or as f.
The next
dropped in both Greek and Latin.
have been used
\
a.
_
the Arabians use as f,
to express a foreign letter, p,
to
This was so
a long vowel on occasions.
well be looked upon as a hard
ijo,
It is a kind
also a guttural consonant,
is
which the c
Greek and Latin, p.
or
absolutely
the more to be expected, as the Semitic letter
became Greek and Latin
may
is
and as the two aspirates were
;
converted into vowels, so was this guttural.
much
but
an attempt to
is
seen in the
is
which the old Persian was Khsharsha.
The
(j>,
held the place afterwards taken
represent our value sh, as
this letter,
than the
being
power.
when the Greek alphabet
The Greek
and the j >.
in
from one another.
very remote
still
and
in place
a better representative of
two sounds are
by the
i
^
the letter
(J^a^>,
letter,
^
It appears never
Greek, even as a numeral
;
differing in
OTTOMAN TCBKISH GRAMMAR.
8
When
that respect from the Tit
letter,
this latter
was retained, modified,
omitted letter
^
was dropped
a numeral.
as
became the numeral
o-a/iTn,
^
as a
But the
representing
900 instead of 90.
From
this omission of the
Greek numerals, a
slip
^
from
its
proper place in the
of the whole subsequent series became
necessary, so that each letter, from
jj
,
<P,
Q, onwards, had a
higher numeral value by one degree in the Semitic than
representative had
in
Greek
has the value of 90 only
for
100 only
;
This
&c.
;
;
standing for 100, while
jj
j represents 200, while
slip is
very remarkable
;
it
P
its
<p
stands
was
filled
up further on by ^ 900.
Although the
six
" additional " letters of the Semitic and
Greek alphabets have no
relation to each other as
sentatives of sound, their numerical value
in the
same order observed
and with the same
is
On
only 900.
additionals,
Latin
v,
u, v, x,
Latin Z.
slip
up
in those
repre-
goes on exactly
of the original series,
to c, representing
1000, while
the other hand, however, the three
^
Greek
0, %, are evidently the originals in form of the
and the Semitic k
This
modern authors,
possibly the original of the
is
letter is usually attributed,
to the
Greek
,
which
it
by ancient and
certainly agrees
with in shape, though not in sound.
The forms of the Arabic and
Persian Ottoman letters given
above are those of the isolated characters.
They
are liable
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
to
various modifications,
9
according to their being
initials,
medials, or finals, in a combination of written letters.
In the
first
place, they
divided into two classes
may,
:
in this respect, be conveniently
those which join on to the following
1
letters in writing
a combination, uL>j u_sjj*- hurufu vwasllyye,
and those which do not so
The
V
;
latter,
eight in
join, ^Q'.O
uJj^
the less numerous class, are:
number
;
All the others join, as
thus,
I
_>!, L->J,
1,
hurufu munfa^ild.
a,
i, i_^,
^>jJ'J>J
^J, j\j,
jj,
an d
^V.
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
10
*"
x
/'
yJS, ^*j
o^*.
,
Ox
,
o
J^a.
,
tyj^
medials, thus written:
Those which do not join
.
_jb,
yl,
Longer combinations vary, ad
-i
,
Aill^b
,
Jjj, l^i,
^,
infinitum, as
5^vpv
,
follows
are, as
u^i,jV.
c
:
&c.
Besides the simple names of the letters hitherto mentioned,
most of the characters have other, more complicated appellations.
xOx
The
is
1
Arabic word
when
it
is
},
usually called hemze,
;
and
ellfl
memdude,
a long vowel,
when
a consonant, in an
^,u*
u_aJI,
or medial.
initial
prolonged
1,
It can never
be
a long final vowel in an Arabic word, being then always
followed by another consonant hemz&
&c.
It
is
It
final.
Arabic
or
;
called ellfl maqsure,
is
words,
it
may
the
1
is
or
final.
It
is
When
When
be short or long.
^
in
When
generally a consonant, and
called
is
always long in Persian
initial in
a long
a short
may
wheii
classical
a Persian word,
initial,
it
distin-
is
guished, as in Arabic, by the sign medd, .u (") over
A. v^sT afet, P. L_>T ab.
jeza'u,
1,
In Persian and Turkish,
always a vowel, but
and hemze.
when medial
so.
iV^a.
shortened
then more commonly written
indifferently ellf
words,
as, ell sha'a,
uJiJI,
^<a
but by no means always
foreign
;
initial, it is,
take the sound
'a
it,
as
:
in Arabic,
or
'e,
of
'1,
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
or of
When
'u.
a short
initial in
may have any one
of the three values a or
of the powers of
in
The
isolated
uj
is
1
L_>
o
as the
;
o, and
^^i
6 \i
the n>
is distinguished, as
o
qiyye),
form with
a medial or
it,
''
while
;
The
ij
is
I do not recollect
'arabiyye), the
and
simple
(tii'l
named
is
Again, the
(j,
o
then iden-
,03
<-'
fev-
*jy olli* (musnatl
^
then
is
Arabian
44^
V
name of
the letter from
all
double-
inferiorly
'
*
j^gl sC (ba'l ebjed),
the expression.
guished from the Persian
The
mu-
also called jsl eU (sa'l sakhaz), the ii o/ ji?.
^ might be called
faiislyye),
(sa'l
'0*
'
The
6 lj
L>
whereas the
;
musnat),
i^i^ *U
called
termed A-iU^ cjUi* (mAsniltl tahtanlyye),
dotted.
(ta'l
from the
initial,
being called
double-dotted
superiorly
A
by
^
of (the word) jz*.
a
tical in
*
further distinguished
is
by being
ta, LL,
lo
xo J
designated AilL
of (the word) c>^J
hAtti), iAe
(ta'i
is
The
the
muvahhade),
(ba'l
named oUl
is
the i,
named
L, also
\j
o
sellese), the triply-dotted c*.
qarashat),
details
distinguished from the other letters of the same
the double-dotted
from the
The
A.
1,
Turkish words are given further on.
form by being called sj^j*
single-dotted
e,
a vowel, and
is
it
Persian,
11
L_>
c_j,
^e
is,
o/ j^J
;
but
however,
distin&>
(ba'l
the
*G
(ba'l
,
+*s
L_>
being called A-^U
m iyy^)j ^ 6
Persian
in purely
_>.
jim, sufficiently distinguishes
other Arabic characters.
no other designation
LJ>
by being designated <u-^c
( bs '^ '4)^
the
It
Arabic works.
It has, therefore,
It
is,
however,
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
12
distinguished from the Persian
i^+sF-
terms dU^*
(jiml farlslyye),
6
are distinguished from one another by the
^
U
muhmele)
(ha'l
mijeme)
t\. (kha'i
sli.
and^bjoij
These two
_, and
neglected (undotted)
distinguished (dotted)
In Persian they are often called A*s
,
*-
^a (jiml 'ajamlyye).
The - and
A*^*
their being styled respec-
and A-^ls
pp* (jiml'areblyye),
tively A-jJc
or
. by
^
;
,
respectively.
(ha'l bi-niiqta) dotless
(kha'i nuqtd-dar) dot-possessing (dotted)
_^.
of Arabic and
all
pairs
through the alphabet,
Persian adjectives go
where a dot
in the cases
the sole
is
''
between two
distinction
(dall mfthmele) j
distinctions
ISj
Jb
A^i" Jli
;
by
^
;
jja
S?*
;
6
1^
(zii'i
hevvez) j
u_i
&c.;
;
(shlnl mu'jeme),
to uJ, the written
(ft),
JilS
;
Cx
(qaf),
j
^\T
;
o
fV (lam), J
With
sJU^
from
is
_
.
;
^
We,
;
^
therefore, say j^t>
then termed
Jo*
gU. (hil'i
OJ
f
^ Jb
^
\j^> (sinl
as,
(ra'i
mfih-
&c.
;
<_
^J
;
names of the
is
letters are
necessary for
(kyaf, vulgarly
kef),
CiJ ;
ox
o )
(mim), ^
a distinction again comes
5
as,
So also the
i.
so distinct of themselves, that no addition
U
;
"
" numeral
alphabet
Jli (zall sdkhaz), i
^
When we come
same form
miijeme)
(zall
the words of the
(dall ebjed),
qarashat)^
mele),
letters of the
^t
(nun),
d
;
^
(vwaw),
j.
in, to differentiate the letter
6 \1
(ha'l hevvez),
hiitti);
and
(j
is
s
;
as the
termed, as
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
mentioned above,
ouL
A-iliatf
being also called jU.
The Persian
*U
musnatl tahtanlyye);
(ya'i
(ya'l hiittl).
and _ are distinguished as
t_*
13
described
is
3
above
and
;
and **..V
slyye),
manner the j
in like
^
different sorts of
d
to distinguish,
is
named A^C
d
Arabian
its
;
among
vulg.
that of our
is
distinguished by the
kyafl
name of
farlsi,
This variety
is
L
dil
;
final
uj
was next
and
then,
is
(kyafl farlslyye,
different methods.
;
thus
:
^^,j*
also
jS$, A^J,
final,
and a single dash, when
O*
'OJ
for the
was
it
letter in all its written variations
medial, and
When
;
letter
sometimes distinguished, in
original Arabian d, when isolated or
O"
Arabian
The
themselves mark the difference by doubling the
upper dash of the
as, dy.l,
original
This
A~-,U
two
writing, in one or the other of
initial,
consonants, the
kefl farlsi), and A!S? wj^" (kyafl 'ajamlyye,
vulg. kefl 'ajaml).
Persians
farl-
(kyafl 'areblyye, vulg. kefl 'drebi), the
v_jo
value
The
:
used by the Persians for their hard g
still,
(za'l
used in Ottoman Turkish, and to point
out their several names, as follows
d
s\j
'ajamlyye).
(za'l
There remains now
called A~-,U
is
*
,
(&-
;
isolated,
whereas the
has no dash at all;
initial or
medial
;
thus:
sOi
shaped ^j^r=a, a7^=u.
these two values of the one letter
d
passed into use
Ottoman language, a new mode of distinguishing the
Persian from the Arabian variety was introduced.
It con-
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
14
sisted of placing three dots over the
Arabian form of the d,
<?
together with a single dash in non-final positions
^
J>^>
,
du
thus marking the Persian hard
;
thus
;
:
g value
d,
J
r
J5i,
of the
letter.
But
in
this letter, so differentiated in Persian writing, received
Ottoman Turkish a third
value, that of our consonantal y,
as a softened variety of its Persian value of
hard
Ottoman value never occurs elsewhere than
at the end, or
Ox
in the
o
middle of a word
^ (ylylrml),
^^0
it
an
e
as
;
duJ/ol (lyranmek).
a syllable
this letter follows a
vowel,
it
d*^o (beyanmek),
d? (b&y),
:
xO"-
-oxo
begin or end
may
When
o
f.
This
g.
be-yan-mek, ly-ran-mek.
u vowel, and
is
itself
followed by
w
the value of our
into
glides
:
In the middle of a word
;
as
X
J
A_$J-*
(suwe), &c.
In Turkish, the d,
another value
retaining
the fourth
still,
O J
sake,
called surd
never
end a
initial.
syllable, as
the d, mentioned
it
;
O-
(saghir nun);
jj^y
medial,
ends
many
it
as in dl (^n),
(q6nur).
may
words.
This value
begin, and
The
may
this
times a single dot
is
Turkish value of surd
^
also
three dots over
in the preceding paragraph, are used
some to designate
dots to
(eanln),
When
being then for distinction's
x
^, ^j ^cL
di^j^/^g-T (anmaq),
is
O
same form, received
the
;
by
and at other
used for that purpose, leaving the three
mark the Persian value of the
letter.
These varying
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
values of the
<*)
constitute a serious difficulty in
read Ottoman Turkish.
A
Surd ^
c
cJU
words
it is,
(gallb),
it
be observed
to
is
Originally
in an
here transliterated n.
is
i&\
much
has a softened value, very
eUlL (daghln, almost
0J&L
o or
Turkish
words.
(da'dan),
u vowel, the c
^IL
,
like that of our gh, but
as
;
*&
cl_b (dagh, almost daw),
:
(dagha, da'a),
When
(da'da), &c.
Turkish words,
in
if
^IL
(daghl,
preceded by
followed by a
vowel, glides into the value of our w, even as our
own gh
O
does in the
(dowan),
:
to the point of practically disappear-
da'in),
8
as
In Turkish
^jJLJL (maglub).
(agleb),
more softened, even
da'i),
Ottoman
in
Ottoman mouth, a simple hard g ;
ing from the pronunciation
an
learning to
similar variation in the phonetic value of the Arabic
letter
ftill
15
word throughout (pronounced thruwout)
J&j* (s6wan),
^ ff^
t
(
(qowiish)
;
or
it
;
as
:
,.
J
^Ic^jL
nearly
dis-
O J JO J
appears in pronunciation, as before
;
thus
ojJjl
SECTION II
The Phonetic Values of
of
of Transliteration,
We
the other
and
the Letters
and consonants.
that every letter
(olduwum,
is
and Vowel-
Orthographic Signs, our System
the Doctrine of
Ottoman Euphony.
must divide the thirty-one Ottoman
into vowels
*iijJjl
(61diiwu, or oldu'u).
or oldu'um),
Points, the Uses
:
But
it
letters (omitting V)
must
first
be premised
sometimes a consonant, while only four of
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
16
them
These are
are sometimes vowels.
1
j
,
,
s
,
^
All the
.
It will
others, twenty-seven in form, are always consonants.
be more convenient to treat of the four vowel
letters first,
together with the vowel-poiuts, which are not letters, but
simply marks.
Usually, the vowel-points, three only in number, are not
written
they are supposed to be known.
;
But, in children's
books, in Qur'ans, in books of devotion, &c., they are written
and sometimes
The
books and papers
in other
vowel-points are
mark of which
towards the
is
named
:
1,
ustun, ^j^-jl (over), the
a short diagonal from the right downwards
placed over any consonant
left,
(no meaning), a similar
2, esere, i^ll
any consonant
;
as: -,
>
-.,
.>,
>- *
j>,
&c.;
3,
*
J-,
to its
o,
-.,
&c.;
uturu, j^yj* (no mean-
any consonant;
originally, the three
as:
Arabic short
The
ustun has the value of & or
ing to the consonant, &c.,
1
,
which the additional Ottoman vowel-sounds,
have been added.
value of
_>
&c.
These vowel- points mark,
vowels, to
as:
;
diagonal, marked under
ing), a small j-shaped mark, placed over
jyj>j>
;
also.
or
1 ;
accompanying
and the uturu that of
it
;
e,
a, a,
a
accord-
the eser& has the
6, u, u, u, also
according
accompaniment.
The
short vowel-sound indicated
marks always
sonant to
by each of these three
follows, in pronunciation, the
which
it is
appended
;
so that
sound of the con-
we have
the following
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHT.
Ottoman
\^t
syllabary, No.
bo, bu, bu, bii
When
it
is
1
17
L> ba, ba, ba, ba, b&
:
v
;
bl, b!
;
and so on through the alphabet.
;
make
required to
the vowel long, one of the
o
three Arabic letters of prolongation,
t^
*
(harfi medd, pi.
hurufi medd), has to be added to the consonant,
j^
.Xo
*
marked with
tion, true long vowels, are
panies ustun,
The
short vowel-point.
its
^
1,
^
j,
letters of
of which
;
always accompanies eser
We
accompanies uturu.
now have Ottoman
1
still
prolonga-
always accom-
and j always
;
syllabary No. 2,
j
as follows
We
:
l>
ba,
apparent.
uturu.
u,
^j
bl, bi
bo, bu, bu, bii
y
;
Our system of
It
represent ustun,
use
;
&c.
;
thus see that there are eleven Ottoman short vowels,
and eight long.
made
ba
As
i
is
them
is
also
method of using a or
e to
transliterating
the simple
to represent esere,
and
o or
u to represent
these vowel-points shade off in phonetic value,
a, a, a, a,
for uturu.
or 6 for ustun
;
1
or
i
for esere
After long consideration,
;
and
6,
we have
we
or u, u,
for
some
years past adopted this system, as the simplest, and, on the
whole, the most rational.
The
in the
words,
values of these
Ottoman vowels are those of the vowels
following eleven words.
They
excepting the French
unknown
in ordinary English,
of some of our counties.
tu,
are all familiar English
the
though
These words
it
vowel of which
is
exists in the dialects
are: far, war, a-(bove),
C
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
18
pan, pen
;
pin, girl
so
;
We
tu, cur.
put,
;
mark the vowels
of these eleven guide- words to the Ottoman pronunciation, in
the order in which they stand
girl, s6,
we
put, tu,
cur
;
and
:
far,
war, above, pan, pen, pin,
for the eight
Ottoman long vowels
use: far, war, pin, girl, so, put, tu, cur.
Ottoman vowel-sounds
in all, long
and
That
nineteen
is,
The
short.
student
has but to remember the series of ten English words and one
French, to become possessed of the key to the Ottoman vowel
But he must
pronunciation.
learn never to swerve from the
values of those guide-vowels.
To an Englishman,
slouchy method, this unswervingness
point
but, with a
;
He must
patience at
little
practice himself in
is
first, it is
^
Is-(temek), c^Ulj,
O
(not
fir-(lamaq),
O
( not
q ul ) y uz
>
(not
(not den), san,
^
j-lj,
q61,
j^J (not
not
jj>. (
qal),
O
y uz
r
>
y uz )> an(i gy uz O->^
words or
also
syllables).
student of Turkish has to exert his utmost
care, in respect of the
the
to be achieved.
J
gyuz or gyuz, though these are
The English
difficult
(which he will at once pronounce right),
J
q ul Jj5
most
pronouncing pasha, U.G
pasha w), baba, Cb (not bayba), dan, ^p
(not sen), ben,
the
with our
Ottoman vowels,
home method of pronouncing a
vowel when long,
in
two very
to break himself of
short vowel, and the same
different ways.
The Ottoman
vowels remain always pure; they never change in phonetic
value with a change in phonetic quantity
;
thus, a
is
always A
LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
made long
A
is
I
;
always
long, &c., in the
The
long, 6
1
always 6 long, u
is
same word and
its
is
always
derivatives.
student will have noticed above the Arabic sign of
quiescence of a consonant.
named
It is
jezrn,
+j and
is
never
placed over a vowel, long or short.
The
Ottoman vowel
fourth
is
sonant,
the soft aspirate
letter,
h, is
but has a special history of
also derived
its
own.
when a con-
which,
,
from the Arabic,
This
letter is
never
used as a vowel in Arabic in any other position than that of
a
substantive or adjective, usually of the
to a noun,
final
feminine
gender,
sometimes
irregular (broken, technically)
*!1 sunne,
*Lli. khalife,
and
singular,
plural.
alii hasana,
Such are the words
>
tayylbe, &c.
In Arabic, these pronunciations (as modified
Turkish, as to the vowels,
of the words
when they
Ottoman
in
to the consonants) are those
close a sentence or clause in classical
are also the pronunciations of the words in
They
reading.
and as
an
sometimes
modern conversational Arabic.
But, originally, and to this day, in classical Arabic, those
and
all
such words end not in a vowel at
in a consonant, in a letter
reasons,
is
of a letter
ii,
.ill
end
which, for certain grammatical
surmounted by the two dots of the o, thus
5
Ox
sunnet,
;
They
never figured o, but always appears in the shape
Our specimen words
t-ZlJ
t
all.
*
are therefore, originally, iLli. khalifet,
*
A ;...%.
*.
hasdnet,
x
C-*
yj
A..
T.V>
tayylbet.
There are other
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
20
vowels and consonants to be added to the termination of these
mark
in classical Arabic, to
Thus
iLli.,
when
the nominative,
definite,
may be marked
khallfetu for
iaJi.
the genitive,
iLli. khallfetl for
x
iLli. khalifetd for
**x
When
the accusative.
the case-endings or declinations.
becomes
indefinite, it
In
iLlL khalifetln, lllL khalifetan.
"-
all
iLli.
khalifetun,
these cases,
when
dropped from
in a sentence or clause, the case-endings are
the pronunciation, though
written in vowel-pointed books,
still
These
and the word becomes simply khalife throughout.
indefinite case-ending
marks are
(tki uturu), double uturu,
and
^Ijl ^->\
^J
may
Turkish jjjj\
called in
^\
be either
In
classical
Thus
we have
that
&
:
,
.
>
When
^L^k^btl
a sentence or clause, the
J O +
final
ketebet,
consonant
three of the remaining words.
O
s
is
So
*
^
becomes nasr, as does ^ai and ^ai, though
tinguished by a servile
fully
is
1
e...
:
'x*-
\
such words are
ketebet, as before, for the first
O
final con-
Arabic,
or vocal with any one of the
silent,
O x x "Vx*
three short vowels.
ill^ketebta,
^J
(Ikl esere), double esere,
(Ikl ustun) double ustun.
A consideration now arose.
sonants
all
final
~'
#
being added
\^aj
made
;
,
final
silent
;
in
so
but ketebt for
^aj
Os
^
f
ketebtu,
,
^
final,
(always dis-
nasran)
pronounced, or only loses the sound of the
,
remains
final n,
and
read nasra.
When
the final
i
of
ia-li.
khalife,
dropped from the pronunciation, the
and similar words, was
letter
might have been
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
dropped
in writing also;
as well.
as
It could, however,
Europe has done
sary,
for
then,
in
iU would
read khallfe just
and would, be read
making
<
It
into Caliph.
it
21
-!
khalif,
was neces-
method which should prevent the
to devise a
suppression of the vowel belonging to the last consonant of
such words, and yet not be liable to be pronounced as a
with the case-endings.
This convenient method was
t
dis-
covered by the arrangement adopted of suppressing the dots
of the i
A_p_J_^-
,
and leaving the nude
khallfe,
&c.
By
this
A
appended
method
final
became virtually a vowel
in Arabic,
tioned as such in Arabic
grammars or
to the
in
A
it
though
is
word, as
such words
never men-
lexicons.
Persian has a very large number of nouns, substantive and
adjective, that end in an
alphabet became the sole
mode
their quasi-vowel
represent that final Persian sound.
gurne,
.sU amilde,
jj--^
was thus made a vowel
the Arabic
Arab
of writing Persian, the
would naturally use
teachers
When
ustun vowel.
reside, &c.,
final
were written.
when
final.
The
It
we have
when no
other device was available.
the numeral A
usually pronounced
A- se),
(si),
three (in
& (kl), that,
a
was
even made to follow one of the other two short vowels
very rare cases,
to
s^ bere, t^k^ su-
Thus,
in Persian also,
*
in
Thus
Ottoman Turkish
A*.
(chl), what, that.
When, by another historical step, Turkish began to be
written in
the
Arabic characters modified by the special
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
22
Persian letters (Turkish scribes learning the method from
Persian teachers in the land of Persia conquered by Turkish
invaders,
who
there embraced Islam), the use of
vowel was found so convenient as
So
\
Turkish
gerunds,
glde, j^jTgyure,
jup
A
further
step
Now,
a whole class of
and imperatives of the third
optatives,
person, end with this vowel
as a final
to be naturally adopted.
were written.
ebe, iit ada, &c.,
5
;
we, therefore, have
jj!
Ide,
qala, \j$ qira, &c.
*J\S
was, therefore, possible to be taken
in
Ottoman Turkish, from which Persian writers had and have
shrunk.
The vowel
was found that
words written
its
alike,
was used
as a medial also,
introduction
whenever
Thus uO;
but pronounced differently.
djb
bllmek, could also be read
they are generally omitted.
If the vowel-points
bllemek.
were always marked, they would
suffice
for this case
The gerund and
"
;
but
optative *L or
c **O
aLj was already in use.
bllemek, the distinction
By
writing
was made
it
served to distinguish two
x
eUb bllmek and
clear.
Hence,
5
dt^AJLj
as a medial
Ottoman vowel, always indicating a preceding ustun short
vowel-point, became fully established.
Turkish vowel
5
eiU^l uremek,
as,
From
we
This medial or
jjjLjl
6daya.
this sketch of the history of final
see plainly
final
never joins on to the next letter in writing;
how
and medial vowel
fundamentally erroneous
is
the
,
common
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
23
European (or rather English) method of transliterating such
words with a
final
or medial
which our orthography
correctness of
German
possess not the French e or
words with a
Jeddah
final
as
a,
to write all such
is
e,
but
;
we
capable, since
is
Mekka, Medina,
j. Jidda,
is
usually spelt
Qdhira (usually Cairo), t^&
while s^aLs
;
nearest approach to
khalifa, Fatima,
These are usual
Brusa, &c.
The
h.
Tanja
(usually Tangiers), &c., have been made into monstrosities.
The phonetic
to the
value of an
initial
1
is
a
at first
difficulty
European student, inasmuch as there appears
nothing like
it
in
more apparent than
Western languages.
when
real,
to be
This, however,
is
fully explained.
p
We
must remember that
consonant, not a vowel.
it
1
initial
1
Like any other
initial
consonant,
takes the three short vowel-points, and
>e,
I
When
it
named hemze,
as
I
'1,
generally
>u.
a consonant (but never
and short)
whether
this
;
initial
it is
when
I
is
medial, or
&c.
1
is
then pronounced:
it
letter,
usually called in Arabic
was
when
a vowel of prolongation, or final
final.
is
With
it
is
always a vowel,
the short vowel-points,
never placed over
L_~J esb, e*-l est, &c.
jl ez,
ulfig,
or
always a short vowel in Persian words, and
the Arabian hemze sign
1
is
became a Persian
although, in Persian words,
initial,
a
Arabic the
in
;
sLJ
it
;
thus
:
Jl er,
Ispah, ^UliLl Isfahan, &c.
;
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
24
This
short vowel Persian system was extended (in
initial
Arabic words used
practice, not in theory) to all
in Persian
f.
with
f.
was then taken
o
(in practice) to
was read ebvab,
became
\jz>\
in Arabic, the
"When,
long, then, as with
Ibtida, J^ol usul
vowel of the
any
thus:
the 1;
nounced
\\
Thus,
1.
&c.
;
initial
consonantal
other initial consonant, a
*
\
J 1
o
a long vowel
letter of prolongation,
*
be a Persian vowel
o
*
,<-.*
uj^jl
But the Arabic consonantal
for their initial letter.
I
vowel
was appended
letter,
I
to
I
t
pronounced
>a,
pronounced
jl,
^', pro-
>u,
>I.
This system passed also into use in Persian words, the
Arabic hemz& sign being omitted, even in Arabic words
adopted into Persian
became the
and thus the combinations
;
Persian long vowels
initial
of.
respectively
a,
Thus
I.
u,
with words originally Arabic
The Arabians found
L-J!!
:
:
111
c
.
;
aba, Vjl
the use of
being pronounced
o,
J
^1
ab,
ubar, ty\ Tzed
ulii,
Cl Ima
medd, to be placed over an
hemz&
b1l|
also,
sign, to designate
they wrote
writing
however,
t->l
II ,
first
&c.
be found
initial
The
I
.
and
&c.
\,
"
sj-
uJ
,
+
and j^
with or without the
Thus, instead of
Persians adopted this system
*_>!!.
The
double
1
system,
in use in native Persian lexicons
section of chapter
not with
called medda,
the long vowel.
ab instead of
is still to
where the
the two
bl >aba,
",
;
;
somewhat cumbersome.
11
5
therefore invented a sign,
They
jl, ^1,
11,
1
is
;
generally figured with
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
useful to mention here, that the Arabian writers
may be
It
long vowel
heinze,
>aluna,
medd
this sign of
employ
I
,
whenever
to
this
e.,
a consonantal
i\j+>.
hamnVu, &c.
i.
25
I
mark
a medial or a quasi-final
followed in the word by a
is
Thus they write
.
jjjJslLa
yetesa-
These medd signs are omitted
Persian, as well as the final
*
so that
;
as well as pronounced, for *1^.
;
\j+*.
hamra
is
written,
&c.
If a medial consonantal hemz& in an Arabic word be
lowed by a long vowel
into one
JIU).
as
it
1
letter
This also
occurs
in
I,
fol-
the two are united, as in the initial
with the medd sign over
it
;
as
I
,
ma'al (for
JU
adopted in Persian with such Arabic words
is
not being found
;
in
any original Persian
in
words.
The medd
sign
is
also used, in Arabic, sometimes taking
another form, that of a small, perpendicular
mark the
to
*,
traditional omission, in writing (not in pronunciation), of a
long vowel
j),
in a
1
few well-known words, such as
^\ >Hahi (for jfcVj), c
^
or
^^^
rahman
This perpendicular small ellf-shaped medd
in Arabic,
sometimes over a
radically a j
,
it
two words
a long vowel
is
ol
letter
1
j
,
in
to
Persian and Turkish
o
o^U.
is
&c.
cjC^),
also placed,
that,
though
pronunciation, in the
hay tit (usually written
and Turkish oC>.) and SjU
(for
mark
-
only, l^>.
Jl 'llah (for
-*
L^,
in
salat (usually written
Persian
sX*
,
in
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
26
The medd
sign
is
sometimes placed, in Arabic, over a long
vowel j or ^, when they are followed by a hemz&
.
word
as in 2j-
;
in Persian or
It
This peculiarity
jpa.
same
not used
is
Turkish.
also sometimes placed over a long
is
when
t^
suni,
in the
this letter is followed
the same word; as:
vowel medial
\,
by a reduplicated consonant in
jU miidde;
it is
not used in Persian or
Turkish.
Such of the foregoing Arabic usages
in Persian for
employed
in
as have been adopted
words of Persian or of Arabic
Ottoman Turkish
for the
origin, are also
same words
;
though
they are sometimes omitted in ordinary writing.
We now
utterly
an
come
initial
vowel
Ottoman use of the medd
to a purely
unknown
in
Thus
Arabic and Persian.
:
sign,
Whenever
of an Ottoman word of Turkish or foreign
\
(European or Indian) origin has the short sound of a or
the
medd
initial
sign
sounds
is
a,
placed over
a, e
;
*Ltada (Turkish); but
it,
as: Jl^*T amiral (French),
jrjT
JjU
(Turkish; also Persian; but
asalet,
two
M,
jjl'avval (Arabic),^! er
different words).
Another Ottoman peculiarity connected with the
when
a,
as a distinction from the
followed in writing by a vowel or
j
,j,
is
initial
that these
1
,
two
vowels are not necessarily long vowels in words of Turkish
or foreign origin.
^I
oflchal,
Thus o^l
jJ^J
ot,
Irlanda.
^\
ur, yj\ utti, csUJj!
They may then be
ntmek,
called
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY".
In
vowels.
directing
many
or
old
27
books and
provincial
writings, these directing vowels are often or systematically
omitted, the writers, from habit, or system, adhering to the
original
Arabic method of spelling by short vowel-points, for
the most part omitted in current writing.
books and papers immensely
The
difficult to
three Arabic long vowels,
1,
This makes such
read and understand.
j, (j,
having thus acquired
a footing as Ottoman short directing-vowels,
an
letter
initial
1
was found convenient
it
,
when
following
to extend
the
system, and to use them as short directing-vowels, following
initial or
medial consonants, thereby departing entirely from
the Arabic and Persian systems.
for distinguishing a long
vowel
There
letter
Ottoman word of Turkish or foreign
venture to say that
all
is
no method
in use
from a short one in an
origin.
We may
almost
such medial vowel-letters in Turkish
and foreign Ottoman words are short vowels
;
whereas, in
Thus
Arabic and Persian words they are always long.
o *
o
jjiU bash,
cx
o J
j&
qir,
jjjj? boziilmaq,
o
".*
1
dJ)^
aghlamaq, (j^)^
sizlldl,
O sOJ *
-OJ ^x"
J
bfizfllmek,
:
o
>
\J>f qAsh, <j*}UI
O*
OxO-J J
x
^jJjjf
gyflrfildfl,
di^^i
gyurflnmek.
Hitherto
is,
those
we have
considered only the open syllables, that
which end with a vowel.
of the closed syllables,
We
have now
to
treat
those which end with a consonant.
In the original Arabic system, when a word or syllable
ended with a quiescent consonant,
a consonant not followed
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
28
by a vowel sound or vowel
same
letter in the
such
syllable,
consonant was marked, in pointed writings, by the sign
placed over
pa?
Thus
.
it,
which, as was before remarked,
u-o beb,
:
^y
t^G bab,
bub,
i_*.o
It is a rule in classical Arabic, that
whether as
initials or as finals.
As
consonants go, this rule prevails
initial
Arabic
to
also,
words or
may
word, they
either by a servile vowel
being prefixed
;
;
1
initial
vernacular
When
generally with an esere vowel,
,
or by a vowel, generally esere, being inter-
and when the combination
K\tjma
consonants
two ways.
is
initial to
syllables are so divided as to separate the
:
two such
be separated into two syllables,
syllable of a word, the latter method alone
Thus
the
syllable,
syllable as
far as
in
syllables are treated in one of
in a
calated
same
and has passed into the Persian and Turkish.
Foreign words with such combinations of
initial
bib, &c.
Such a word or
unknown.
crust, tart, blurt, flirt, &c., is
called jezra,
two quiescent con-
cannot follow one another in the
sonants
is
has become
^&\ iqlim,
Tcral
is
a non-initial
used, or the
two consonants.
has become J^i
qiral,
prince has become 2:^ plrlnj, and Svizzera has become j$.y\
isvicher.
In classical Arabic, a
terminate
in
final
word
in a
two quiescent consonants
;
phrase or clause could
as
:
)L, rabt,
J&
c
ilm,
O c*
^j* huzn, &c.
This liberty
is
much used
in Persian,
Turkish,
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
and foreign, as well as
When
g^ plrlnj
writings,
the same word,
in
but one sole letter
is
made
means a
by having a
it
is
special mark,
",
J umm,
nunciation.
&c.
It
is
We
Thus we
a sine qua non in
Ottoman reading,
letters in the pro-
can derive a correct idea of this reduplication
run next, &c.
ill-luck,
such reduplicated Arabic word has passed into ver-
Ottoman
then
use,
ordinary conversation
;
shed d, which
j*i
the redoubling
is
a
aqtar
This
it.
JU> baqqal, J&if. 'attar, j* medd,
w~*lc 'illet,
by studying our expressions, mid-day,
nacular
&c.
;
two, in pointed
placed over
and in correct speaking, to redouble such
if
:
not written twice,
strengthening, corroboration, reduplication.
have, oj-l shiddet,
But,
{prince)
to serve for the
an abbreviation of the Arabic word
is
oj vldd,
piiins,
thus
;
a letter in an Arabic word ends one syllable, and
begins the next
mark
Arabic Ottoman words
in
^^
e>-^o durust, ^1 ard,
29
as
;
in
the
excused
in
a
,
words JUb baqal, ^Lkc
&c.
This reduplication
sequently,
is
really
reduplicated Arabic
Persian without reduplication
;
unknown
words
thus ki*
in
are
is
Persian
;
con-
much used
in
generally used in
o -
Persian as
into
\ai.
khat, and has thence, as similar words, passed
Ottoman Turkish.
On
the other hand, pedantic imitation
has commonly given to a few Persian words the Arabic peculiarity
of reduplication, so passing into Ottoman also
:
thus,
30
y
y
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
is
per (a wing),
sometimes pronounced
perende, sjj^ perrend&
;
This reduplicating system
full in
o*X**l
it
The two
such Turkish words
and
;
jj^
;
sometimes met with in
is
letters
should be written
in
thus, jJujfr chulluq, jJJjf b611uq,
ernmek, &c.
The Arabic word
letter
perr
not used in correctly writing
is
Turkish Ottoman words, but
incorrect writings.
^
&c.
1
,
hemze,
}*a,
as before explained,
besides being a
is
name
for the
name of an
also the
ortho-
graphic sign, mark, or point, very variously used in Arabic
Most of the
and Persian.
rules concerning
it,
which derive
from the two languages, have passed into Ottoman Turkish,
with an addition or two used in the Turkish transliteration
Turkish words never require the
of foreign words.
The hemze
sign,
would appear
",
sign.
diminutive head of
to be a
the letter c, thus indicating to the eye the guttural nature of
the vocal enunciation
choke, in an
nunciation
it
Arab mouth.
it
is
final.
But
which
is,
in Persian
in fact,
a softened
and Turkish pro-
a slight hiatus, at the beginning of a non-
the end of any
initial syllable, or at
or
represents;
It is placed over a letter
or lituru vowel, or
is
quiescent
;
syllable, initial,
when
under
it,
it
medial
bears the ustun
generally, with the
esere vowel.
The hemze,
in a
word of Arabic
a consonantal letter
I
,
origin,
always represents
sometimes radical, sometimes
servile.
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
In Persian words, the theory of the sign
Arabic, but the sign itself
is
always
31
the
is
same as
and either
servile,
in
final
or nearly so.
When
a hemze, radical or servile,
never written or pronounced
word,
it is
The
letter is then
1
ingly.
ibll
in
;
treated accord-
is
Jo! >lbll,
;
become*
2>
J >umm, becomes J Amm.
These are
>ef kyar,
0x0
O
nqbal, becomes
JU1
These
are all
initials
all
radicals,
***
o
So again, J&\
short.
an Arabic
Persian or Turkish.
Tbus, JJ'emel, becomes jll emel
o x,
and
in
initial
taken to be a vowel, and
l
Jjl
is
J I
O
*
c
becomes J&\ efkyar
JlJl
;
JJ
ttmur &c.
^jj >umur, becomes^*!
The modes and
servile, and short.
Iqbal
;
;
doctrine of making them into long vowels have already been
In Persian, Turkish, and foreign words, an
described.
1
always a vowel, and
is
the
word were of Arabic
When
medial or
play.
is
made long
origin, as has
initial
same way as
in the
been said before.
a hemze, radical or servile, in an Arabic word,
final,
is
a rather numerous body of rules come into
Sometimes the
letter
1
,
then always called hemze,
written, together with the hemze sign over
and sometimes the hemze sign above
now, without the
yetesfi>elun.
if
1
,
in the
is
it,
1
(as in
is
^^ re's),
figured, as a letter
body of the word
;
as in ^^Llii
In the former of these two cases, the hemze
is
o
usually a
final,
quiescent consonant
re>-fet,
^C rae>-men, &c.
initial
consonant of
its
in its syllable
;
as,
In the latter case, the hemze
medial or
final syllable,
oil,
is
the
movent with
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
32
tkttin
;
be both
as in
;
\^
that
is,
is
also
syllable,
begin the next syllable.
may
with any other consonant so occurring, one
this case, as
alone
may
it
hemz& may terminate one
while another, a movent hemze,
In
But
jezfi'dn, &c.
juz-^n, \%J*
a quiescent
written, with a hemz6 sign over
the teshdid sign
is
superadded, with an
it
;
and above
this,
sign over
tistftn
I
it
irf
again
;
phrases
what
as in Jli"
;
tefe>->el.
This step never occurs
but the explanation
is
needed, so as to
in
Turkish
make
clear
follows.
This reduplicated medial hemze, movent with
sometimes followed by a long vowel
1
.
In
usttin,
is
this case, instead
'
*,
of writing, for instance,
<jjl, ra>->as,
bined into one, with the signs
the istun vowel
;
the two letters
thus, (jJ. ra>->as, as before.
tion is of very rare occurrence,
words, of which the root
1
are com-
medd and hemze, and without
This combina-
happening only
is triliteral,
in derivative
with hemz
for
second
radical.
But a movent
may
It
initial
hemz& of a
be followed by a long vowel
is
medd
1,
syllable, medial in a
then figured by a single written
signs
;
as,
JU
signs,
1
with the hemz& and
m&>al, &c.
These combinations, when used
and teshdid
word,
without being reduplicated.
Turkish, drop the hemz&
in
but preserve the
vowel that precedes such medd sign
is
medd
sign.
The ustuu
hardened from
& into d,
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
on account of the following
33
even with a preceding
a,
soft con-
sonant.
But,
esere,
when such medial
is
it
hemze
or final
is
itself raovent
no longer written in the form of
\
;
with
then takes
it
the form of ^5, without dots, and with a hemz& sign over
If
as, {Jjfj rens.
vowel
its
with hemze sign over
it
is
uturu,
as,
;
examples the vowels are long
some perchance used
Of
course,
the
;
it is
^
in
movent or quiescent,
is
is
is
into a
;
^
;
and when movent
^
;
in either case
;
oJ
*
thus, (JU ^> bl>sa,
^g
may
in
bu^a.
be followed by a long
mesnil,
figure,
becomes changed
Arabic, into a consonant
^
* o
letter; as, ^ly ffbad, JjJ~-
,
^Jjl eb'us.
hemze, whether
final
written as a letter j
Such disguised medial hemz&
hemze be changed
or
ra'ls,
preceded by a consonant movent with
surmounted by a hemze sign
it
short.
o jo*
*
figured as a letter
with dturu, the hernz&
1
which they are
^^
Thus,
Moreover, when such medial
vowel
letter,
^
long vowel letters do not then follow the
o
vowel
;
In these two
ru'us.
}
it
but there are words in Arabic
in Turkish,
modified, disguised hemze.
esere, the hemz&
written as a
U J;
re'Is.
If the
and be followed by a long
Turkish, and sometimes in
as in
i^*
l^,
rlyaset (for o*~U;
rl'aset).
There
is
derivatives,
and has
a striking peculiarity in certain Turkish Ottoman
which causes great embarrassment
filled
to students,
continental Turkish dictionaries and
grammar*
D
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
34
with totally misguiding examples and rules of pronunciation,
with regard to the interchangeable vowel-letters j and
The
peculiarity arose, I imagine,
was
provincial,
all
in
made
writers
earliest
various
its
in all
use,
provinces.
such derivative
words, of the vowel-letter j (when they used any at
They, therefore, wrote
Vj^
qinib,
^5.
Ottoman Turkish
and was governed by the pronunciation of
Asia Minor, variously modified
Thus the
when
t~>j^ gelub,
C-JJL^ qiirub
t_jj.U
and j&U bdshlu, jJUl
;
These derivatives became,
<^>j^ gldub,
all).
qachub,
ellu
;
&c.
Europe, and
in course of time, in
in Constantinople, modified in pronunciation into gellb, gldlb,
q&chib, qirib, qurub, bashH,
elll, <fcc.
The orthography, how-
ever, has remained sacred, excepting in the case of provincials,
who sometimes
C-AJ^J
,
vjjy
,
write, as they pronounce,
(^lj
,
$\
,
developed in the paragraphs
Proceed we now
The
letter
t_j
,
i_*jf ,
V-AJ.J^,
*-*-^
>
This subject will be further
&c.
on Euphony.
to the phonetic values of the consonants.
equally used in Ottoman words of Arabic,
Persian, Turkish, and foreign origin, has the value of our b
generally, whether
Thus
l>\jj
erib,
:
Jj
rlbat,
L-J/*.
bed,
L,
j
rabt,
it
blr,
be
initial,
j*
bar, j-j biz,
c^j subut
barb, t-Ja qalb
;
ending a syllable or word,
;
&c.
it
medial, or final in a word.
jy
buz, buz, buz, boz
;
LjGi kltab, t_jji. jenub,
^J\
But when medial or
final,
sometimes, anomalously, takes
LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHT.
TITE
Thus
the value of our p.
gk$
top, Ijol iptldii,
<L>j
with the gerunds
in
c^S
yazip, ilyji/l oqiiyup,
Tlie Persian letter
^CT ipar,
word
it is
ol
o
et,
our
is
oT at,
t in all
c^l
L-A-.)
d^j
^^
The Arabic
tli is
in think;
was not
s
gldljl
;
t
o, J
Idljl
as,
(sharp, never
d>&
it
durt,
^^
^J
;
git,
durdunjil,
&c.
^jj
;
c^jl
glder,
&c.
a very
in
Its original value is that of
z)
;
unknown
;
aya-sulug
is
C^*
pronounced
is
Turkish
in
pronounced
therefore the Turkish
-
i^j\3 is
But
the letter
O
-"
O
siiblt,^! eser, ti>lja.l Ihdfis,
In some Arabic-speaking countries
;
when
JoJej
oJ
so that cjlybl fiya-thulug, for 07^0? #60^.0705,
O
a
taj, taj, JJl etel,
in derivatives,
.>
peder,
and the Turkish
found in Arabic words only, and
this value is
name of Ephesus,
&c.
U
:
as bad as our bishop for einovcoTro?.
and Persian
as our
as,
^X;!
few borrowed from the Greek.
our th
;
esp,
^^ durdu, ^^ durdum,
durdun, 5^^ durde,
*Lji-? gldlp,
g&Hp, vjj>^
In Turkish grammar
6t.
o^l
It,
and quiescent
^Sj] Ider, cl^JuJ Idlp,
it,
cjjlf
cae
i_>.
positions
sometimes changed into movent
originally final
kltap,
this the
in all positions:
^jj
o
is
is
qirip.
our p
top, are usually written with
The Arabic
Uis fetva,
is
L_J
gldlp,
^j-$>
The Persian word
u_*jj Ip.
L-}jL>
as,
uAjL)
to hear,
Especially
kltfipji.
;
L_JJ
common
it is
35
this letter has
become
tdlata, &c.
The Arabic -
in
Turkish
is
our
soft g,
which we represent
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
36
by a j
Thus,
^>\
(J
(j-^. jine,
speaking countries
raesgld,
of
,
6sf
it
We
J
isisT^"
J
x
vjjf* chnruk,
churek,
takes the sharp sound
horse, hurl, her
^^\ achmaq, J. cham,
(
J
O
x
r
l^ja. chorba,
>\
eU
ich,
in
letter,
;
not
_&
Turkish
but not as a rule.
-.,
sound, as heard in head, him, half,
its soft
used in Arabic words
^
fettah,
h, to distinguish
The Arabic ^
We
j^rh.
from
it
5,
q.v.
;
as,
,-^A- hisin,
it
represent
it
Aspirate
has no equivalent in our language.
counterpart of the Scotch and
German
the student has learnt
it
as
especially
is
it
O
hidiv, not kldiv),
"-*
A,
;
is
the
ch in loch, ich, &c.
It
and never pronounce
initial.
00 "
h
Until
true pronunciation, he should con-
its
a variety of
when
by
always.
It
generally transliterated kh, as in the present treatise.
sider
chek,
has the harshly aspirated sound of our h in
chiefly
v^wa. huseyn,
some adopt
our trans-
in
(not Persian, and there are no Arabic) words,
The Arabic
is
as,
;
O
orthography
In Turkish derivation, this
chlchek.
It
latter
J
sometimes becomes Arabic
is
it
as, jsr**
;
the value of our ch in church, of our tch
never use the
O
or foreign
&c.
hard g
like our
Sometimes
always the former
literations,
Ci^ja.
aghaj.
pronounced
origin.
In some Arabic-
q.v.
in crutch.
x
-Ul
ejuas,
is
segda, &c.
The Persian _ has
r,
whatever their
positions of all words,
in all
-
Thus
it
as a k,
khidlv (pronounce
ji^i-
^
^Lijaj'^i.
khdd..vendghyar (pron.
hudfi...),
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
In Turkish words, this
Ikhlfimur.
^.U shfikh, jj+y-\
often used, provincially, for
nounced j.
aqsham
Thus,
(for
,
j;
as,
our d in
s is
all classes
o, and
ji.1
;
ilL,
Different
this,
ji
The Arabic
words
e^
thus,
:
(v?</^. zlklr),
is
.
lb
d&gh.
a
is
It
z.
is
found in
The Turk
z.
x
o
jj.u me^khuz,
^b bar,
ard.
^,1
important remarks, however, which
it
is
bezr.
all
classes of
There are two
necessary for the
English student to bear in mind with respect to this,
peculiar
letter.
Firstly,
it
secondly, the value of the vowel before
for, far
;
cur,
cur
other consonant
^
pir,
j*
qlr,
;
JJ
;
(as
it
in the
^
qir
&c.
;
q6r,
^
qiir,
^
pa't)
same
when we pronounce
&c.), but always kept
thus,
to
him,
must always be pronounced (never
dropped or slurred over, as we pronounce part,
must never be corrupted
reads,
x
^,jj
our r in every position, in
re 3 fet,
;
Arab communities pronounce
o j
zlkr
in the
that,
sometimes takes the
it
as a d, or as a
QC>-
akhz,
of Ottoman words, and
be to repeat
an Ottoman mouth,
j, in
as our soft th in
s
lill
used instead of U in original words also
is
dJL^gltmek, Jl^glder
The Arabic
o Q
it
of Turkish words only,
Arabic words alone.
it
sometimes pro-
bakh&lim (for
^JUb baqdlim),
plifi
requires no comment, unless
derivation
itself
is
&khsham).
The Arabic
place of
and
letter is
;
and
syllable
pot, pat
\
pure, as with any
sur,
jfgyur,
&c.
;
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAM3IAR.
38
ox
The Arabic j
z~id,
i\j
jjl
i\z
;
o
zir,
j_>_j
literated zh
It
The Arabic
words.
O Ox
is
J
;
~
lz >
f
It
and
is
;
transeta-
8-^i pezhmurde, ^jjLLJl
of very rare occurrence.
a soft
is
<j
s,
always followed by a
must never be pronounced as
qavs,
jj-
z
;
soft
vowel
thus, ill
asii,
^\
ish,
suz, sdz.
our
is
sh,
always
;
ill shad,
as,
neshr.
^ja,
and foreign words
,j*^l
only.
in Turkish,
^
used
5,
in
vowel
;
Turkish,
thus,
C"O^
O-O^
J2>\
it z.
very peculiar, being used in Arabic words
is
sometimes as a hard d
pronounced as a hard z
;
thus,
J>\j razi,
Us
O
x
^U qadf, jClj! ^U
Its
a hard
also, to designate a hard
It is generally
x
is
asmaq, j^-sj^ susmaq, j.n.^ qismaq. Never read
The Arabic
&c.
J
^z>
O
The Arabic
i\ss,
y^>
<i*
^z >
in treasure, pleasure,
s
zhazh,
j\j
The Arabic yi
i
ziir,
nezc1 >
only found in Persian and French words
is
as,
;
mazh6r, &c.
jS
z6r,
jjj
of the value of our
in all
O"
oo x
j
&c.
The Persian J
it is
our z in every word and every position
is
o
qazl-'l-'asker
Arabic sound
is
^^
Turkish, but
qaza, ^llil enqilz
O
(vulg.^CLc
inimitable to a
in
^
;
^
qaz'-'a^ker),
European without
long practice.
The Arabic
t>,
always as a hard
besides being an element of Arabic words,
t,
is
used in Turkish and foreign words,
sometimes with that value, sometimes as a very hard
d,
when
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
c>
Thus,
tiilQ',
^IAJ? tiqdmdq,
The Arabic k
j;+iKjli>
davranmaq.
used in Arabic words only, as a very hard
is
o
J
Thus, Jt
z.
il&
tatll,
OxOxOx
Oxx
diigh, jjo tuz,
jik
i.khatt;
qiitr,
39
Jk
zallm,
JLU
ziilm,
zifr,
jLb
LI
zdfer,
hazz,
kjks? mahzuz.
The Arabic c
It
only.
is
as
is.
a general rule, used in Arabic words
a strong guttural convulsion in an
Arab
throat,
softened in Turkish to a hiatus, and often disappearing entirely.
"We represent
^L
by a Greek
it
word
^jJL melun,
'anlbd (for
AJ^C
always written with
The Arabic c
hard
g,
ik5 qat',
^1)
cjW
.
'asr,
The Turkish
its
derivatives,
this letter, of course corruptly.
a peculiar Arabian kind of
originally,
is,
with a sound vergeiug on that of the French r grasseye,
gallb,
medial or
is
it
pronunciation
imitate.
But
either a simple hard g,
when
final in
changing, like
into a
it,
aghlamaq, clt
dilgh,
O
;
often
;
Thus,
s6wuq
initial
;
as,
Arabic words only, or like our softened gh
hard vowel.
J
in Turkish
gay da, &c.; and either that when
dilfi gaflet, sill
in Turkish words
O
maqtu
however, with
is,
which English dandies sometimes
uji
Thus, ^ac
spiritus asper.
1
ta'n,
J
x
w
is
our
^yi* magfur
and
iltilrn
;
^^\
oldAw^i, ^Ic^* sowau, J^-Jo diwan,
s
jjcUo tawAq,
The Arabic ^J
so,
sound after or before an
JlLil Igfal, c.^, sadg,
^^
or nearly
disappearing,
J
^o^
/
IfiwAti
in all
;
&c.
words and
all
positions.
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
40
There
is
no reason whatever
Latin-French ph instead of
khalife, alll.
Thus,
The Arabic
is
j;
is
g-
f
as in caliph, a corruption of
t
in all
words and
erroneous and regrettable to represent
done.
The words
rectly
rendered,
J^
farz, klf lafz,
JT
our
the senseless, false
to write
^J^J qur>fm,
jjl
all
by k as
it
is
t
generally
are thus cor-
its
represent
It
positions.
o5j wqt,
aq,
the k to
leaving
sof.
legitimate
ancestor, d.
The Arabic
When
initial in
d, in
words and
all
positions, is our k.
all
a word or syllable before a long
and also before a short utAru vowel,
mouth, the sound of a y after
it
or j vowel,
1
borrows, in an Ottoman
itself before the
vowel
Thus, iLitf'kyazib,
J^s
J^^sj
kli-Jim,
addition;
^^\
6kyul,
Its
vekil.
ab^9
kyilpek
;
but not
;
so before the short ustur, the short esere, or the long
I
vowel.
^^=
kcdl,
name, in Arabic, requires no
but in Persian and Turkish
it
has to be distin-
guished from the Persian letter of the same form, but widely
different phonetic value.
'areblyye.
It
is
unchangeable by grammatical
words,
then termed
A-J-J^C
In Arabic and Persian Ottoman words
when
final,
it
becoming movent, and
even as a y
;
inflexion
undergoes
is
it
in
kyafl
remains
Turkish
phonetic degradation
on
pronounced as a Persian d, and
or sometimes as a
Thus, dLjl lp&, c&SLjJ
;
but
^_J$
Ipeylfi,
w
after
&L>\ Ipeye,
an uturu vowel.
jCj
Ipeyl
;
e)^l
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
sftluk,
dL^jJj-j suluyuii,
Itmek,
^ ^"*--*\ Itmeyln.
The Persian
_90
^^U
i
'ajam kafl),
is
i.=^ suluye, ^>^ suluyu;
v, called A _-^Ls
kyzifl farlsi, or
is
,j^
_jo
_j^kyafl
^.
it is
undistinguished from
its
with a double dash
it
Turkish books
it is
The Ottoman
in
segln,
JS gjulj
:
s
some
In
^g-
*'
^ du.
dots: J5,
previous writers, eastern
all
by
but the Persians
;
^'
&-*
V
marked with three
d, ignored
final
Ox
(*i^-
seg,
Arabic original
O */
mark
^sF
In ordinary writing and print
J^ gal.
;
^J
in Arabic,
never
is
*
u*L
Thus,
syllables.
A^=^-* sege,
^^1, segl
unknown
and
O
Turkish words or
and
filrlslyye,
'ajarai (vulg.
It is
Persian words,
in
kyiifl
(
*
the Persian ^ard
unchangeable
41
and western, consequently nameless, but which we venture
to
term
jJlJ-ff
kyafl 'osmanlyye, the Ottoman
t_^S
found in Turkish words only, as a medial or a
as an initial to a word,
though
a non-initial syllable.
Its phonetic value
all cases,
though
radical, as in
it
has no
dJ bey, J^S
it is
mark
dlyll,
used as an
is
is
never
final,
letter in
initial
that of our y in
to distinguish
^^. ylylrml
ts),
;
or
both
It is
it.
it
is
gram-
matical, declensional, servile, representing a softened Arabic
radical or servile d,
e&Cp
kyupeyln,
become movent,
iJl^kyupeye,
surmek, ^cCJ^j--* surmeyln
.
savdlyln,
o^j-
;
d^
sivdlyl.
as in
^^
*b^^
kydpeyl
kyupek,
;
ctLJ^l
savdlk, jCj^j_-. savdlyim,
Most European
writers
42
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
represent this value by gh
but the practice
;
is
insufficiently
considered, and altogether misleading.
The Ottoman
nasal d, distinguished by the
is
^jiyiU saghir nun,
of the letter
<<*),
Spanish nasal
name of surd
or nasal letter, which
we
transliterate with the
It has the phonetic value of our English
n.
In ordinary writing and
nasal, as in sing, thing, &c.
mark by which a student may recognize
has no
times three dots distinguish
marked
it
with one
dot,
it,
never
initial to a
As
word.
sometimes begins a syllable
maq),
^^
JLf==T
ailiz,
it
is
a medial,
as,
lanil (vulg. till)
When
medially
final it is
;
with
it
in
t<*)
,
anna-
(vulg.
j^I
final to
denlz,
a word,
(dan),
^
c*L-
s6n (sin).
usually softened in like manner, or
jpM<^l and
In
derived from e)Taii), the following J
porated
dots,
as, i*L bei! (ben),
oJlL daii
ti^galln (gdlln),
elided in pronunciation.
but some-
;
sometimes ends,
J>j<L* gyuiiul,
usually sounded as a simple n
When
it
(
;
it
This value
j+\ s,\ aiilamaq
s^jfp s6iir& (vulg. sAra).
sanlii (sanln),
is
;
print,
with him the three
(as
<<*)
it
ng
and one recent writer has
serve to point out the Persian letter or sound).
is
n,
a second special Turkish phonetic value
is
its
derivates (itself
exceptionally incor-
pronunciation, as though by a kind of
inversion of the Arabic rule of conversion for the
J of the
definite article J! before certain letters called solar (for
which
see next paragraph on letter J).
The Arabic J
is
our letter
I
in all
words and
all
positions
;
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
J
luzum,
as, rj
mentioned above,
with
is,
exception of the capital
The Turkish word
dal.
Jb
aUn,
its
43
modern Ottoman
derivatives, a
and the Arabic rule
;
version of the J of the definite article Jl
,
for the con-
in pronunciation,
when
followed by a noun or pronoun beginning with a solar
letter,
ur*^
J/* harfl shemsi, into that solar letter redupli-
a teshdid,
cated by
The
compounds.
is
a classical exception, peculiar to Arabic
solar letters are fourteen in
the half of the alphabet)
\j,
1
k
,
J
t
o,
^,
cl>,
Tnus we have B^Jl
u
>
viz.,
;
^>j>j>
et-tln,
es-s^mn, tjTf ed-dA 'ii, Ji=jJi ez-zlkr,
esh-shems (whence the name of
ed-dnh^, ez-zuhd,
O
the written
over the J
;
,
The Arabic
all
In the pronoun ^JJI
the letter
letters +
^
and
^
es-semek,
t
ez-zilm,
and
its
The
is
^1
el-
derivatives,
*
sign
named
placed
vwasl, J-y
of that word, specially modified.
are our
words and positions: JU mal,
^j*.
,
so omitted in pronunciation,
is
\j>
l^Jl es-safa,
'
of the article disappears also.
and
>
es-semen,
(
yj
J
^^Jf
JUTi
j^>)
u*
u**
{
jljl
et-tall',
'&''
lazlm, ^^Jl en-nur.
junction
jJlkJl
number (exactly
JJ
772
and n respectively,
ernel,
in
~j beulm,ykU nazlr,
hAzn.
The Arabic
vowel.
When
letter
^
is
sometimes a consonant, sometimes a
a consonant,
it
has the phonetic value of our
v,
of our w, or of these two combined, the v beginning, and the
w
ending the sound of the
letter.
Thus,
J(j var,
^\j>- jewab,
44
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
j-j vwasf,
The
vwaqf.
3lj
alone can
ear
But when the consonant j
differences.
Arabic word,
is
as, Jjl avval, Jlja
Ottoman corruption even then may sound
qavval.
lettered words, as a reduplicated
qawwaf
qawaf)
(or u_s^i
w
these
reduplicated in an
has always the v value;
it
decide
qawwul.
in
hard
The word
uJlji
it,
an Ottoman corruption of Arabic
is
iUi. khaflfaf.
\
When
it
the letter j
a vowel in an Arabic or Persian word,
is
always has the value of u; excepting a few Persian words,
become Ottoman vernaculars,
Thus,
,j^
^j^5
which
in
memnun
lurum, ^j^**
.j
;
6,
which there
or of u, u, u,
shiir
is
may have
6.
do.-t (dust),
c^-^-i
;
In Turkish and foreign words
khosh (khush).
generally, if not always, short, and
of
takes the sound of
it
is
it
either the value
no means of distinguishing,
With
save that of accompanying hard or soft consonants.
a
hard consonant, in a Turkish or foreign word, the vowel-letter
j (often omitted) must have the sound of either o or u, unless
it be considered
thus, j^i
long, when it becomes 6 or u
;
qomaq,
either
J^,ji>
u or
With
qurmaq.
u,
u
or
u
;
as,
a soft consonant,
d^ji yuzmek,
is
lost
;
derivatives there
as,
is,
\y
b6z,
If
suzlu.
be neutral,
buz, buz, jj-. suz,
all
In
suz.
however, frequently a servile vowel or
o
consonant, hard or
must be read
j-)j^-*
the accompanying consonant or consonants
guidance
it
soft,
that helps.
Thus,
buzlulAq, &*jj> buzmek, Cil^j-* suzmek
;
^
t
but
J J
J
^jy
bozan,
y^*
J
J^^J
suz has no
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
such helping derivative.
As
must decide
individual ear
to the long
and short value, each
for itself in
words of these two
Vowel j
Turkish and foreign.
classes
must be preceded by
O'OJ
O
* r
1
45
to represent
an
never
is
initial
it
;
uturu sound
initial
;
J
ulmek, &c.
as, jjjjl olrnaq, aLjjl
has already been fully discussed.
The Arabic
letter
The Arabic
letter ,j, like the j, is either a
5
consonant or a
vowel.
When
whether
a consonant,
it
be
initial,
Especially must
this
it
has the value of our consonant
be understood when the
As
sonantally fiual in an Arabic word.
as a consonant,
we
we
use a y as the
transliterate
final
y,
medial, or fiual, simple or reduplicated.
it
a consonant, and only
a y.
by
letter is con-
Therefore,
of a transliterated Arabic word,
be read and sounded as such, never as an
i
vowel
;
when
it
must
an obser-
vation that continental scholars do not generally understand,
unless they
c
yedek,
jt,
o
^
at
first,
JjJ
as
When
or
i
mey,
^
veshy, ^1* meshy.
we have
the
sound be
^
is
beyn,
OX
ox
og,
^
oox
J
yaz, j^_ yuz,
shey, ^\j re<y,
remy,
Thus we have: j>_
OjJ
o>.
may be Germans.
-
initial
in
boyun
This
it
is
;
qayyum,
djj
c^
^
pey,
^
^
vely,
^
00-
Ccix
^
hayy,
nothing like
a vowel,
^^
yer,
0,x
a difficulty to a student
it
in English.
is
never
initial.
If a vowel
t
any Ottoman word (Arabic, Persian,
Turkish, or foreign), the ^,
if written, is
always preceded by
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
46
an
1
;
long
^jjl
as,
When
j-oV/J irlainaq.
Idl,
Arabic and Persian words
in
medial,
In Turkish and foreign words, medial vowel
not always short;
in
an Arabic word,
razi,
cb
dfi'i,
j^J
as, i^U^j vlrinek,
^l-
jaii,
"When
qirmaq.
^U
qiizi,
But there are
&c.
sari,
always.
^cj bin.
(j is generally, if
also always short; as,
it is
<^,U
emTr,
as, j+*\
;
it is
final
^^
hosts
of Arabic words ending in reduplicated consonantal ^, which,
Persian and Turkish, are used as Arabic words, generally
iu
adjectives, terminating in a long vowel
^^i
<jj^* senevi,
shehri,
Li\ Afiiqi,
(JiAa. hlfzi,
&*>
as,
'arebi,
When
&c.
reduplicated nature of
apparent;
.^c
their
yevmlyye,
1
or
^jt
!
;
^^_ yevmi,
as,
faiisi,
jJas qat'i,
these become feminine, the
consonantal
final
&~*h.9
<_$
becomes
qat'iyye, &c.
There are many Persian derivative words, adjectives or
substantives
really end
not used
others
(besides
long vowel ^.
in
The
in
Turkish), which
adjectives are precisely
similar to the Arabic adjectives just described, as modified in
Persian and Turkish
jbU.
but they have no feminine.
;
shahi, 'royal;'
(jjj***.
The
'of Shiraz;' &c.
khiisrevl, 'imperial;' \^'}j^ shirfizT,
substantives indicate abstract qualities;
'
a?,
(^^
tions
;'
shilhi,
'
royalty
;'
\j>\) veziii,
vezirial office or func-
&c.
Turkish and foreign
short vowel
sin!,
Thus,
" O J
x
>/\
;
as,
final
^jo kedl,
6dayl,
^}
^, radical or
^1
ari,
terejl, &c.
fec.
;
servile, is
always a
baba^j\ evl, ^**CC
TUB LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
The vowels
arid
1
sometimes interchangeable in
are
>
47
Turkish words and derivations, and are sometimes omitted,
without any inflexible rule being assignable.
eL,u^J
is
:
,
e*C*2.1
,
Itmemek, are
Thus, dul^jl
The
admissible.
all
,
true rule
" Never introduce a vowel letter into a Turkish or
foreign
possible doubt as to pronunciation
word without removing a
never leave out a vowel in such word,
doubt
Arabic and Persian words
is
fixed,
;
by the omission a
The orthography
created as to pronunciation."
is
of
and admits of no such
Persian words admit, however, of abbreviation by
variation.
the omission of a vowel
as, sU.
;
iuiolj
padlsh!ih),
(vulg.
if
^ sheh
shah,
padsheh
&Jtl
;
sUob padshah
shahlnshah,
<LJ^ shehlusheh
shahlnsheh, sll^i shehinshah,
Turkish words the vowels j and
In many
<_$
;
jJLiaU,
&c.
are used for
one another by different writers, at different times, in different
places
;
even at one place and time
advisable.
JO^gellr
;
Thus we have:
jj\ aru,
dri
^l
;
even by one writer at
document
different times, or in the selfsame
a license or an inadvertency.
;
;
but this
last as
Consistency in this matter
jU>b, b&shln,
words
&c.;
bashli,
Jib
$
is
gelAr,
differently written, but
the selfsame in reality.
The Ottoman alphabet
sonants, hard, soft,
number
:
.
,
are only six
:
,
I
^ ^
,
,
is
divided into three classes of con-
The hard
and neutral.
o
,
j
,
,
L, k
(j-
,
,
c, c, j.
letters are nine in
The
soft letters
(
d
,
5
.
The remaining
letters,
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
48
sixteen in the whole, are neutral
As
word
LJ
,
i> , i> ,-.,, A, i,j
the orthography of every Arabic and Persian
fixed and unchangeable,
is
foreign
Ottoman words, and
,
Ottoman
Turkish and
it is only in
the declensions and conjuga-
in
Ottoman words, that the
tions of all
and
:
rules relating to hard
This
soft letters are carried out.
the
is
and chief
first
part of the beautiful system of Ottoman euphony.
If any one of the hard or soft consonants
Turkish Ottoman word,
letters of the word, of
or conjugation,
the
all
must be of the same
Thus we have: j^lS qazmaq,
J^J gizdlyl
;
jj^fii
qarliq,
The Ottoman vowels
hard vowels are
:
vowels also eight
are
a, a,
:
radical
gezmek
<!*Lp
^Jj/gydzluk
;
or
!, T,
1,
6, 5,
i,
li,
u
;
neutrals.
accompany any class of consonant.
Cl ana, lib pasha,
^
servile
^jo*J6 qazdigM,
;
&c.
eight in
u, u, u, u.
&an,
^
The
a
declension
are also of these three classes.
a, e,
the
and
its
in
of the neuters.
class, or
The
These vowels always accompany
a, a, a.
of consonants,
j^ojii
other
derivations, and of
its
used
is
The
all.
The
soft
neutral vowels
their
neutral
own
class
vowels can
Thus we have
:
bb bukl,
ben, j^,J qirmaq, duJ-T glrmek,
qomdq, J^js qArmaq, i^UJ^gyuzetmek, isl^jTgy \irmek.
When
letter, its
in a
Turkish Ottoman word a vowel
is
the dominant
consonant or consonants being neutrals, the decleu-
THE LETTERS AND ORTHOGRAPHY.
sion, conjugation,
Ox xo
O O ^s
dll Jl elemek,
When
^J\ atmaq,
thus,
;
O^ O J
xG J
O--
j*V^l irlamaq, <j^jl umrnaq, jJ/jl 6ghramaq
aghirliq,
Jjjjfrl
and derivation from that word follow the
which the dominant vowel belongs
class to
49
inmek,
(sJuJjl
csLjji
an Arabic or Persian word
Ottoman Turkish,
;
yuzmek, (Jl^l urmek.
declined or derived
is
letter or
vowel
decides whether the declension or derivation shall be
made
in
from,
its
dominant
last
with hard or soft letters and vowels
rJO
Ox
Jcx
j^l?^* merbutluq
asanliq
jj*l
;
o
emir,
o
;
thus, Ljj^* merbut,
o
>
dJ^J
emirllk
oo x^
"*"
^Ll
;
asan, j^liU
&c.
;
When
the sole dominant vowel of a Turkish Ottoman word,
or the last dominant letter or vowel of a Turkish, Arabic,
Ottoman word,
is
possible consonants, and
all
Persian, or foreign
or soft,
all
of the o or u
class,
hard
vowels in the declension,
conjugation, or derivation therefrom, not only conform to the
class of
such dominant, but furthermore,
all
consecutive servile
vowels in the derivatives that would otherwise be
become
liturti,
of the class of the dominant
A when the dominant
dominant
61dA
;
is ft
or
ti ;
u<*j> tutgnn,
is
6 or
li,
that
is,
esere,
become
and become u when the
thus, {^>j\ olgnn, <jILi)j! olgAnhiq, ^jJjl
jL2jL
titgiinliiq,
^jl^> tutdii
surukdurulmek
mek,
;
;
;
dl
(sC,*, surush-
surAs
ek, dij^j^j.,*,
eilj^*, surAshdurmek,
dijjj.,*, surAshdurAlmek
J
gydrushmek,
ttlJJy^
gyurushdurmek,
E
;
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
50
gyurushdurulmek.
come
But
if,
such words, an ustun vowel
in
by the ordinary course of derivation or conjugation,
in
and be followed by a
syllable
or
syllables with
vowel, the influence of the radical dominant uturu
by such intervention
o
;
as, <j^i)jj
- o 1 t
maqliq, jyuUi)^ b6zushmaghin
gyurdshmekllk,
^^Cl
;
is
an esere
destroyed
bozAshmaq, j>lJUi^> bozAshO'ojj^
ooxoJJ
1*1^^ gyurushmek,
CHAPTER
II.
THE OTTOMAN ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
The Noun Substantive.
SECTION t
THERE
special
isJcjl
If the female of an animal has not a
no gender.
is
name,
a hen, jjl^J (qisraq), a mare,
as, jjjlk (tawiiq),
(mek), a cow,
jpsite
(qanjiq), a bitch, the female
O
as
with
a
lioness
named
us,
;
a
.>
(dlshi)
;
but
mentioned as j
is
matron, accordingly;
as,
.Jjo
as, ^^Lj,!
If the female be a girl or
&c.
dlshl,
Jb
she...,
^s?*Ji^J
There
^15
is,
.c?^' (ashji qari), a
(dlshl arslan),
woman, she
or
(qiz), maiden,
(qiz khizmetjl),
(khizmetjl qiz), a servant maid, a maidservant
ashji), or
named,
is
xO Cx
woman
;
never
is
^J
(qarf),
or^J ^^* j*.
js^\ ^Ja (qaii
(
a cook woman.
cook,
no declension of nouns in Turkish; but
really,
the prepositions, perhaps eight in number,
by some termed
postpositions, are subjoined to the noun, singular or plural,
the plural being always formed by adding the syllable^!
ler) to the singular
;
thus
O x
O J
Nom.
jjjl
-9
Gen.
6q
(arrow?),
O J
j-^-*j\
-"O
J
(^5jl
6qun
(lar,
:
{of
),
6qlar (arrows).
J
e^lsjl
oqlarin.
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
52
Dat.
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
A-frb
chardagha,
soften
into
Turkish
jLll
(Ip6y6),
it
(Ipeyln),
Those
chardaghi.
i*b,
d
These
tives
;
jCL
Those
Jv- (*PW1
in Persian
sfontf,
d
(0
dx_i* (sengln),
(sengl).
rules do not apply to Arabic and Persian substan-
these retain their final
borrowed word has passed
everyday expression
consonant
^
(babauin),
M>
dominates)
;
into the
d
final
A^J
unchanged
mouth of the vulgar
^
consonant
^lAT
;
as,
in the genitive,
UL (baba), father,
jJ (qapA),
(babayi);
(qapuya),
^jJ
an
and
s
separately on account of
two
(kedl), cat, db.jT(k6dinlfi),
dliUlj
door, gate,
(qapAyu, where uturu
t
letters ^),
<u^T
*
^^
(arlya, written
(ariyi)
;
(^^.3
^^(kedlye), ^.^jS^kedlyl),
Singulars ending in vowel
sign of the plural, in writing
(sii),
as
dil-J flstighin, &c.
(ariniia),
(ari), bee dc^jT
^J\
*
*
The word y>
unless the
;
dative and accusative, to support the
(babayd),
dJjJ (qapAnAn),
or
in a vowel, take
in the
vowel taken by a
j
as, ,jp~9 fistiq,
;
Singulars ending
dij-
d
Arabic
(y value); eS^I (ip6k), si7&, dCCljl
value), do not change it; as, diL- seng,
L; (senge),
in
5
;
do not join
this letter to the
as, sj-j (pide),
water irregularly forms
,
&c.
JJ^J
its
(pideler).
genitive as
(suyun, almost the only exception or irregularity in the
language).
<jj*>
(s6y),sor, ends in a consonant, and
>J* (s6yun), 4ji (soya),
J^,
(s6yii).
is
regular;
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
54
Arabic and Persian substantives never change their
consonants for declension
elllj
;
(Imsak), refraining,
j^> (tabaq), plate, &iL> tabaqin
;
{
iS\L*\ (Imsake)
Their
worship, (jXe (salati).
final
rules with those in Turkish
oi
;
(slat),
vowels follow the same
final
Icj (du'a), prayer,
words;
du'anln); s^Cj (piyiide), foot-man, *J6.Lj (plyadeye);
charsu), market, ^j-^s* (eharsuyu)
^ti
root,
J&
;
(sulasi),
triliteral
(sulasiyl).
They form
Turkish words
their plurals as
;
but Persian
names of men and
their kinds use the Persian plural also,
if
This
judged proper.
is
formed by adding an ustun vowel,
o
followed by ^\
,
OOx
to the final consonant of the singular
is
it
changed into consonant
vowel, before the ^1 of the plural
^
o **
j
o
,jl>^t.jji.
instead of
^
arms,
^UbL-
saying:
rolled
"
e)
;
Those ending
in like
(slpahlyan).
The
final
into one.
as,
s
(Persian), with ustun
A*!^
(kh'iije), master,
vowel j take conSingulars ending
J o
J
as, j^vj^ (khub-ru), a beauty in face,
(khub-ruyan).
into consonant
;
c*J
in
^Ka.lji. (kh'ajegyan).
sonant
as,
If the singular ends in
^* (merd), man, ^1^* (merdan).
vowel,
;
* Ox
O
manner
vowel
^C-
<j
change
it
(slpahi), man-at-
[Persian writers explain this by
long vowel
One
as,
;
in
of these
is
is
in
reality
now used
two
letters <j
as a consonant."]
Other Persian substantives form the plural by adding the
syllable
hones.
U
hii
;
as, l^iU
(nfin-ha), loaves, breads, \$~*\ (esb-hii),
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
for
men and women,
for these
and other things,
Arabic plurals, of the regular forms
and of the various irregular forms
and
also the
Arabic duals, are used
in
formed by adding ustun followed by
which becomes
^
J
is
The
0T> 1
u^rJi9 (qiitbeyn), the
;
latter is
as, vliaS (qutb),
o
^LWS (qiitban),
two poles.
regular plural masculine nominative for men
by adding nturu followed by
becomes eser& followed by
^
^
(In)
;
by ol
(at)
This
in all cases
OOJ
a Muslim, <jjjl~o (musllmun), cj..L
>
is
with
o J
o
J O J
formed
in the oblique case, also
the plural feminine
o
ftstun followed
is
(un) to the singular.
used as a nominative in Turkish
O
dual
(an) in the nominative,
(eyn) in the oblique case.
O ^o J
The
The
Turkish.
frequently used in Turkish as a nominative
pole,
55
thus, .LM> (musllm),
;
O
-
O J
oUL*
(musllmin),
(mt\s-
llmat), Muslims.
The
irregular Arabic plurals
commonly used
are of rather numerous forms, and there are
forms used occasionally.
in
Turkish
many more
plural
These irregular plural Arabic forms
are not obtained by adding a letter or letters, vowel or consonant, to the end of the singular, but
or vowels of the word, and
vowel, as
letters
of
the case
the
may
singular.
by adding
by varying the vowel
letters,
be, before, between,
To
enable
the
consonant or
or after,
student to
the
obtain
a fair insight into this very intricate but beautiful system,
I
have to
say, first of all, that a
paradigm has been adopted
by Arabian grammarians, according to which
all
such modi-
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
56
fications
may be
effected.
They have taken
(fa'ala) as the representative
the
of any and every
triliteral
ji
triliteral root-
word, and they have modified this root into every shape that
can, under
any circumstances, be taken by any derivative of
any
when
not
effected
made on the vowels
by adding
All those modifications,
the language.
triliteral root in
alone of the
a
servile letters, or
and
there, before, after,
are
triliteral,
servile letter,
here and
in the midst of, the three radical
consonants, with appropriate mutations, in each case, of the
vowels, long or short, in the
new word.
Thus,
to
speak only
of Arabic nouns, substantive or adjective, used in Turkish,
have, in the first place, to learn the
(for they all
have
we
forms of their singulars
and then the forms of the
definite forms),
plurals special to each of these singulars.
To
facilitate
and systematize
knowledge, the Arabian
this
grammarians have divided the whole language
of
biliteral,
triliteral,
quadriliteral, quinqueliteral, &c., roots,
' )
X J
which they term,
(ruba'i),
^cbj
respectively,
^Ct
^LJ
(suna>l),
to
;
but
it
may perhaps be
found.
Of
the
quadriliterals
coming
^^l>.i
for uniliteral
these, the triliterals
form by very far the most important and numerous
next.
These
I do not re-
have seen or heard the expression
(uhadi), which would be the analogous name
root
^j^U (sulasl),
(khumasl), ^-lil (sudad), &c.
are the Turkish pronunciations of the terms.
member ever
into sections
These
are
class,
represented,
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
by the supposititious paradigmatic words
respectively,
(fa'ala)
and
Every
57
JU
(fa'lele).
capable of giving rise
triliteral root is theoretically
Ox
O
to fifteen chapters of derivation, called cjLj (bab, pi.
These chapters are respectively termed
ebvab).
the chapter
(fa'ald babi),
of
the triliteral
babi), the chapter
of (the verbal noun)
(mufa 'ale babi);
^C Jl2l (If al babi)
6,
11,
)
;
9,
^C jlJl
(Iflvval
);
The use
unknown
9 and
^
(If
14,
^C
5,^1?' jltf
(tef 'il
JblL
(tefa"ul
);
)
;
Hal);
12,
^C j5lUl
^ JUJl
(Ifinlal
from the
last
in Turkish, if not quite so
J^Usl
jjj
3,
;
^-AS J*9
); 7,
of words
11,
;
J^si-J
^
1,
^'j^J (Inffal ); 8, ^jlT juJl
J^ (IfHal ) 10, ^b JUil^ (Istlf al
(tefa'ul
^UjiUJ
(f ftial
4,
2,
:
* Of
<->\j->\
,
J^Lsi
,
is
(tfl al
); 15,
^
);
13,
^C Jljjl
jLJl (Iflnla
four chapters
is
;
).
next to
and the use of chapters
;
confined
to the
colours, the second expressing an intensity
expression of
of degree.
All the
other nine chapters of derivation are constantly met with in
Turkish, as nouns, substantive and adjective.
even a verb
is
All but the
first
used
;
Occasionally,
but as a kind of invocatory interjection.
of these names (which
out of the six varieties of
its
verb)
is
is
the form of three
the form of one of the
verbal nouns, or of the sole verbal noun, connected with the
verb of the chapter;
and each chapter has two adjectives
'
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
58
deriving from
it,
of the chapter.
the active and passive participles of the verb
The
its
or
verb other than
its
chapter possesses,
triliteral,
forms of nouns deriving
other special
furthermore, several
from
first,
verbal nouns (which are a kind
of infinitive, or noun of action or being, corresponding with
our English substantive form in -ing,
as,
walking, singing, cutting,
Of these,
suffering, lasting, &c., as acts or states).
merely those frequently met with
in
Turkish
;
I give here
and
it
must be
understood, that in this simple triliteral chapter, the various
forms of verbal nouns are never
verb
;
all
found deriving from one
but certain forms belong to one or more kinds of
literal verbs,
again, are of
two
sorts
tri-
These kinds of verbs,
others to other kinds.
there are verbs transitive or active,
;
and there are verbs intransitive or neuter
;
and certain verbal
nouns are more used than others with each of these two kinds.
Again, there are the six conjugations of
chapter
;
and each conjugation has
forms of verbal noun.
on
this subject
vol.
i.,
preferential
The Turkish Qamus
form or
dictionary dilates
more than other works, and much information
can be obtained from
in the "
its
this simple triliteral
it,
in addition to
what should be studied
of the Arabic Language," by Dr. Wm. Wright,
"
nomina verbi "
p. 109, par. 196, where 36 forms of
Grammar
are given for this triliteral chapter alone, and several others
may
be found in
1831, vol.
i.,
De
"
Sacy's
p. 283,
Grammaire Arabe," 2nd
par. 628.
Those
edition,
that are principally
ACCIDENCE OK ETYMOLOGY.
used
Turkish are the following:
in
3, jij (fl'l)
6,
&
4,
;
(fa'ale)
;
jlj
(fii'l)
A&
7,
J
1,
(fl'le)
&
8,
;
(fii'le)
JUs (flal); 11,
(fa'ale)
13,
;
JU,
JU
16,
J^j (fuul);
(fu'ule); 20,
21,
^
*LJ
<j
17,
J^J
22,
;
(mef'al); 26,
^
(fl'lan)
oJUs
intercalated: 29,
1
original substantives
forms here given
;
nomen
^
(fd'alljet)
;
patientis, is:
and
jQ (tef al);
30,
in frequent cases
(fa'lle)
33, JyJu
38,
J^
J-J
(fa'l);
(fdll)
;
36,
jjS
(fA'lan)
;
:
the
JUJ
:
W
25, jial
(mefile);
o, with long
Many
(tlfal).
disputed whether
it is
The
[>
;
chapter
is:
active par-
31, Jcli (fa'il)
and the passive
participle,
;
32,
nomen
(mef ul); 34, feminine, Jjail (mefule);
derivative adjectives are
as: 35,
19,
;
and the special
servile
initial
;
Jl2
and adjectives are of one or other of the
agentis, of this
feminine, a-l cl_a
12,
:
(mule);
such words are substantives or verbal nouns.
ticiple,
JliJ (fd'fil)
15, J^xs (f&'ul)
:
(mef'dle); 28,
with the two special forms in
vowel
9,
:
with their feminines
,
(mef'll); 27,
J^l
23,
;
;
some of the same,
^
18,
(flll);
^
servile
initial
;
(fa'le)
the same, with final servile ^1 added
special feminine form: 24,
forms in
(fiiale)
and their feminines
;
(fd'ile);
(fa 'Ian)
JUi
14,
;
\
and their feminines
(fu'al);
(fl ale)
with long vowel j or
a-CJ
the same forms,
;
with an insititious or servile long vowel
10,
5,
:
J
2,
(fa'l);
their feminines
;
59
met with, branches of
(fd'il)
;
37,
J^i
and the feminine of
(fd'ul
this last
;
.
this chapter,
oftsn feminine)
39, *L
(fa'lle)
;
;
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
60
the diminutive, substantive or adjective: 40, jxs (f&'ayl); the
noun of unity:
A&
42,
(fl'le)
alas (fa'le)
41,
the noun of kind or manner
;
the noun of place and time
;
sometimes mef'll and iLdu mef 'ale)
abundance
receptacle
mlf al&
;
:
:
44, ilxL (mef 'ale)
45, JaL> (mlfal
muf lil
rarely J*o*
which need not be
special forms
43,
:
jiL mef 'al
;
the noun of the place of
;
the noun of instrument and
;
jJL
sometimes JUa* mlfal, and
j
:
mufAle)
and &du
classified here,
and others
;
still
though a knowledge of their
and meanings, when acquired,
an accurate appreciation of Arabic
assists greatly to
diction, as occasionally
met
with in Turkish.
The
the words are substantives and masculine, are
(fu ul)
2,
j
6,
Jllj
Vli
3,
;
(fa*ala
J\i
and
(fu"al)
8, *&> (full a)
10,
and
;
7,
(fl'al)
;
;
culines)
9, 3JUif (efila
for the form
A
, 1
1
_.
16,
for the form
;
14,
JSU
their variants)
;
and others more
&
(fa'a^ll
E'ile); 15,
JcUl (mefall
4,
;
jS
A-LU (falU
&
in form, either; 11, J^s (fTal
(full
met with, when
irregular plurals of these forms mostly
;
;
(efile)
;
both for the form JcU)
;
(ef 'ul)
fa'la);
or 13,
;
&
5,
when they
jQ
for the forms
Jcly (fevall
;
1, JUsl
for the
JJU
fl'le),
(ef al
JUi
;
fa ale,
form
(mefail
rarely used.
;
fall)
;
are feminine
or 12,
J^
as for mas-
J^
Jl_clJ)
for the forms mefal, mefll,
17, J-fitiu
J^
both for the form
for the form
fu'le),
;
;
;
(ef al)
:
;
fa'ule
besides
mlfal, and
for the forms JldU,
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
Adjectives masculine derived from this
much used
J^i
(ef'al)
for
Arabic
for
Arabic
61
triliteral
two forms
in Turkish, are of the
J-xs (fall)
i^
<J*9
;
(fa'la,
not comparative) or iis
(fu'la,
when
of the same Jxsl
;
plurals of these are
the substantive
when
of jisl
}U
:
(fn'ala) or
and Jxs
;
d\
(fi'l), for Jxsl
(eflle), for
and
as in
J.^,
feminines.
its
now come
The
verbal nouns of the second chapter are
to the derived chapters.
o
;
The
comparative).
We
JUAJ (tefal
and
^
feminines, respectively, *LJ (fa'ile) and
;
chapter,
sometimes
tifal),
and
WJ
:
(teflle)
o*
J-jtaJ (tefil),
;
the plurals
*s
O
of the whole of
which are of the form J^lw
(tefa'il)
;
makes
also a quasi-regular plural,
ol^"
(tef'i'at).
the
first
Its active participle is jidl (mufa"il,
its
passive participle
is
which the masculine
fern.
Jxa* (mufa"al,
is
aLL
though
mufa'lle)
fern, dliio
;
and
mufa"ale), of
also used as a noun of time and
place.
The verbal nouns of the
and
JU
(fl'al
participle
is
;
third chapter are
aLcll. (mufa'ale)
this latter only occasionally used)
Jc>
(mufa'il, fern.
participle, jilll (mufaal, fern.
first
:
JcU* mufa'lle)
&L
;
;
the active
the passive
mufa'ale, exactly like the
verbal noun).
The
verbal noun of the fourth chapter
(muf '11,
fern. ,*ul); p. p.
is
jiH (mufal,
JUsI (If 'al)
fern.
;
a.
p.
OTTOMAN TUEKISH GRAMMAR.
62
O,
The
fifth
*);
'll, fern.
The
Uu
chapter has
sixth
v. n.
:
(mAtefaal,
The seventh
(mAnfa'al,
J^
jllij
C.J
J*aJ (tefa"iil);
(mAtefral,
(tefa'iil)
a.
p.
J.L. (mute-
fern. AU:.l).
Jcllju (mAteffill,
;
dk).
JU1
(Infi al), J*j>H (mAnfall,
^uH).
The
eighth
The
ninth:
no
:
p.
j9.
v. n.,
:
jQ
:
(Iftial),
J&L
(mAfta'il,
(Ifllal), a.
JuJsJ
(Istlfal),
(m4f4H
j5Ul
U
f
mfifalle);
^?. ^?.
The
tenth:
jxIiH
(mfistefil, itoll),
(mdstef'al, *UilI).
The
no
eleventh:
J^M
1
(
^
lni aO> J 1
(mufftll,
i?. ^7.
As
to the significations of these chapters,
said that
when
or intensitive
causative
;
still
the
first is transitive,
and when the
in the
same
the second
first is intransitive,
shortly
causative
is
the second
sense, but not intensitive
(a thing) do or be (so or so),
and
so), of
so and so)
The
may be
is
tran-
Sometimes the second has the sense, not of making
sitive.
(so
it
;
but of making
(it)
out to be
deeming, judging, pronouncing, or calling
rarely,
it
unmakes
(it
also.
third chapter denotes reciprocity of the action between
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
or
two,
many
when one agent only
reciprocity
letters (to
mutually writing
of a reply
tion
or
several
among
;
agents,
63
shown.
is
an
or
one another), a writing
JLS a mutually
striving to
expected
Thus,
kill
A.J&*
a
in expecta-
one another,
O O J
When
fighting.
the triliteral
is
expressive of a state, as ^^a.
(husn), a being beautiful or good, the third form expresses an
..-
action corresponding with that state in the agent
and
(muhasene), a doing good,
to
kindly
acting well,
- j
thus, A^(S?
;
(the
other).
The
fourth
intransitive
O
thing)
The
by
j.
fifth
one's
^rv
times
art,
;
causative,
Jll^l
(Irsal),
(Iqbal),
;
sometimes
an advancing.
form has the sense of acquiring a
own
as,
generally, but
a sending (some person or
act,
^.uJ
i.
e.,
state,
sometimes
sometimes through the act of another
(tekessAr), a becoming broken.
&c.)
The
thus,
;
is
*>O
JLsl
;
form
(ta'allum),
a learning
;
as,
This may be transitive at
a becoming knowing
in (a science,
(it).
sixth form has the idea of reciprocity, something like
the third, but more decided, more certain in fact
(taqatftl),
a mutually killing one another.
sense of feigning a state
ignorant.
;
as,
Sometimes, again,
UlLJf (taqaza),
it
jl(J
;
(tejahul),
it
has the
a feigning
expresses a repeated act
a dunning, repeatedly demanding
and discharge (of some incumbent act or debt).
JJUJ
thus,
Sometimes
;
to be
thu.,
the fulfilment
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
64
The
seventh and eighth forms, like the
acquisition of a state, either
of the act of another
one's
by
own
act, or as the result
thus, JUnil (InfTal), a being acted upon,
;
a/ected, hurt, wounded, vexed (by another's act)
a (becoming) looking forward
;
transitive
is
thus, ^l^isl (iftlras),
a seeking to acquire;
or,
;
as,
x
the
in
of
sense
O
^UJI
(lltlmiis),
obtain (a favour) by (morally) feeling one's
groping, requesting)
(Intlzar)
an acquiring (game) ly huntO
ing
Jk&\
;
(for the occurrence of an event).
Sometimes the eighth form
acquiring
imply the
fifth,
a seeking
way (by
to
touching,
a requesting.
;
The
ninth and eleventh express two degrees of state as to
colour,
and sometimes as to defects; the eleventh denoting
intensity of that state
ness
;
thus, ;\>&\ (Ihmlrar), a being red
;
}s**\ (Ihmirar), a
being very red ;
x^jp-\
(1'vljaj,
;
red-
a being
crooked; crookedness; -.Lasj-cl (fvijaj), a being very crooked ;
anfractuosity
The
.
tenth usually expresses a trying
signified
by the
first
an explanation of
form)
;
as,
(a matter).
^LJLj
(the act or state
to get
(Istlfsar),
Sometimes
it
an asking for
has,
like
the
second, the sense of deeming or judging (a thing) to be (what
the
first
form
signifies)
;
as,
JliLj
(Istlsqal),
son or thing) heavy, disagreeable, tedious.
means an acquiring a
(Istlshfa),
state,
And
expressed by the
a becoming restored
a deeming
first
to health.
(a per-
sometimes
form
And
;
it
thus,
again,
it
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
occasionally
(tstl'dad),
has the sense of the
form
first
a being or becoming ready
(external or mental); mental capacity
and
65
as,
;
prepared
readiness
;
quickness in acquiring
dexterity or knowledge.
Quadriliteral roots have but four forms
are perceptibly used in Turkish, the
;
first
of which only
two
and second.
The
has two verbal nouns, figured paradigmatically by Ju/
first
(fa'lele),
JW
and j5u
(fi'lal);
iLlUl
(tefa'lul);
the
(saltanat)
a verbal noun of the
first
second, but one, figured
may
by
serve as an instance of
form, and
^WuJ
(tesaltun) as
an
example of the second.
would occupy too much space
It
to detail here the modifica-
tions of these results arising in the case of roots
where the
second and third radicals are identical, or of those in which
one, two, or all three of the radicals belong to the trio
out of which the long vowels, the
spring.
De
These
letters
details should be studied
Sacy's Arabic
Grammar.
But
it
is
I,
^
(j,
of prolongation,
in Wright's, or in
necessary to remark
that these Arabic verbal nouns belong equally to the active
and passive voice of
their verbs; so that, as in English, the
same word,
for instance, will
:*
fet-h
sometimes mean a con-
quering, at others a being conquered, just as our
does.
not
This
last rule
much used
in
word
conquest
holds good with Persian verbal nouns,
Turkish.
It
is
not
so,
however, with
Turkish verbal nouns, excepting, to a slight extent, with the
F
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
66
present, as in A* ma,
me
and
;
this for the simple reason that
every passive Turkish verb has
its
own
nouns
special verbal
complete, present, past, and future.
Every Turkish, Persian, and Arabic substantive has
its
diminutive, the two latter seldom used in Ottoman phrases.
The Turkish diminutive
substantive
whatever
Thus,
(*Ly
d^liT
jlk) a
syllable do- (jlk) or
whether
origin,
a
(eiikjlk)
(kltabjlk or
little clerk,'
is
formed usually by
o
o
suffixing the
to
j>>. (jiq)
the word, of
end in a consonant or vowel.
it
plum, dJii
little
J^llf kltabjlq) a
a
gsLtjd (devejlk)
a
little
flat-iron,
a
little
apple, j^Ailj (pashajiq)
little
a
dlssjT(kedljlk)
a
little
a
(Itjlk)
book,
little
dog,
^^(kyatlb-
camel, sUj^l (utujuk),
little cat,
little
JAjf
(elmajlq)
pasha, (jsf'Uolj (padl-
O JJ +
shahjlq) a
little
monarch,
jfeJjfr (khojajiq) a
(Jfrj?
little
(qipAjiq) a
professor,
little
&$J*
door or gate,
a
(qarijlq)
little
ivoman.
In words ending with
or j, after a
cs)
would form a cacophony to repeat
The
diminutive.
less
important
is
movent consonant,
these
letters
therefore
it
the
for
sacrificed
to
euphony, and omitted in the diminutive, a vowel letter usually
taking
its
place:
shovel or oar
;
e^jT (kyurek), etLs^r^yurejlk),
j^y*. (chojuq),
This form of the diminutive
of JKJL (j&ytz), j*l
(
jaghlz)
;
<Jjjis
(chojujuq), a
little
little child.
sometimes modified into that
thus,
j^]f
(^vjeylz) a /zf^
AOMM,
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
^JL^-J
vowel of the
d
little girl.
As
is
diminutive has
in the
-.
as the esere has
Turkish
a
(qizjaghiz),
been passed on
(y value) or
c.
(soft
gh
to the
67
seen, the former esere
now become an
or
<*)
j
,
modified into
Euphony
value).
ustun,
requires
it.
These diminutives are used as terms of endearment
also,
German, and as our nursery vocabulary
says,
exactly as in
daddy, mammy, granny, aunty, doggy, horsey, &c.
;
Turkish, the method
all classes,
not
by children
is
of universal application, by
only.
The Persian diminutive always ends
U
(pa),
only, in
AAJ (pache), or in
d
in
*>.
(che)
preceded by an ustun vowel
j^(kenlz), c^Jr(kenizek).
The Arabic diminutive also makes
its first
as,
;
;
as,
vowel uturA, and
the next vowel ustun, followed by a quiescent consonantal
<_$,
whatever may be the vowels or quiescences of the original
word
;
as,
^L^* (hasan),
^cl* (huseyn)
;
^^a* (hlsn), ^.^a.
(hiisayn); &c.
The Persian and Arabic diminutive
applies
The Arabic
rule has
substantives and adjectives.
fications in details.
tives
But
are taken into
as these Persian
Ottoman use
equally
many
to
modi-
and Arabic diminu-
as original words,
has been said on their subject for the present purpose.
enough
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
G8
SECTION
As
The Noun Adjective.
II.
a general rule, the adjective, in Turkish,
is
invariable,
having no gender, number, case, or degrees of comparison
and
this,
as,
always precedes the substantive qualified
OxO^^OJ
dj~j (bljuk adam), a great man, JLo! dj-j (blyuk adamlar),
origin.
OX**
+*\
;
whether the word be of Turkish, Arabic, or Persian
O
great
It
;
J
men; Jijjl dj-j (blyuk
Inekler), big cows.
But the Persian form of phrase
in writing),
is
also
much used
(especially
by which an adjective of Persian or Arabic origin
follows the substantive qualified
such adjective remaining
;
in
the singular after a Persian substantive plural, the substantive
qualified always taking
C O 1
adjective
du
;
thus,
an esere of subjection
J
d^}-?
-O
to join
it
to the
f
^i^* (merdanl
b&zurg), great men
works.
j^l^Uc ('amelhay! nlk), good
If,
in this Persian construction,
the substantive
is
both words are Arabic, and
a feminine singular, or an irregular plural of
any kind, the adjective must be put in the feminine singular,
or in an irregular plural form
as,
;
aVtV J>
L^
('dsaklrl
mun-
c
tazime), regular troops,
llJLe ..^-L^L"
X
\
X
(selatlnl izam), great
Sultans.
Persian adjectives have three degrees of comparison, more
or less in use in Turkish composition.
formed by adding the syllable^
(ter) to
The comparative
is
the end of the posi-
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
tive
69
and the superlative, by adding the syllables ^J?
;
(terin);
but these never qualify preceding substantives, being only
used as substantive members of phrases, or to qualify a
following substantive
>ill
nejat), the best
nejat), the lest
of
thus, olai
;
the
(blhterint vesa-
have but two degrees of comparison.
(efal).
This
positive, the comparative
substantive than an adjective.
it
exceedingly,
nejat),
is
is
more
more
as a
If followed by a substantive
a superlative with the sense of very, extremely,
and the
like
;
thus,
oU t&~j ^\ (ahsanl vesile'i
(J
a very good means of salvation.
stantive be in the plural, the adjective
the sense of the most
nejiit), the best
;
as,
If the following subis
a superlative, with
ol?i J5Lj cr->l (ahsant vesa'lll
of the means of salvation.
If an adjective be used as a substantive,
it
admits the
Ox j
plural
of the
used, in Persian construction,
is
as an exaggeration than as a degree of comparison,
singular,
vesfi'lli
means of salvation.
Arabic adjectives
J3
^.^
means of salvation; (blhterin
Whatever the form of the
form
JjLj
.
and the prepositions, as substantives; thus, Jij)\
(iyuler),
o * J
the
good;
i^)j>l
(lyulerln), of the good, &c., &c.
Every Turkish adjective, besides
its
positive signification,
betokens, on occasions, the comparative, the superlative, and
an excess of the quality
employing the adverb
it
expresses,
too before the
which we explain by
word.
Thus, dj^ (blyuk),
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
70
large, larger, largest, too large;
too hot
The
( s P<l)>
jVg^
hot hotter, hottest,
)
&c.
too cold;
Jtjj*> (soghiiq), cold, colder, coldest,
;
much used
Persian compound adjective,
the positive degree only,
is
of
many
in Turkish, in
Some
kinds.
are com-
which may be
pounded of two substantives, one or both of
Arabic or Persian, never Turkish
majestic as Jemshid
Jj^ai
;
^jJ
(sheker-leb),
<^Ju>\
(asaf-tedbir),
light
of foot, light-footed ;
;
(jem-jenab),
Asaph
just)
(i. e.,
by a substantive
+>
in counsel
KlLlI tU'Ic
sugar-lipped;
destgyah), a very loom of justice
adjective followed
ejlla.
as,
;
('adalet-
others of an
;
^L^a^
as,
(seb&k-pay),
or a substantive followed
adjective
;
as, alllj.* (dll-tlshne), thirsty-hearted
desirous}
;
or a substantive preceded
by
o o
ox
**>
;
(i. e.,
(hem);
by an
ardently
JuLl +&
as,
(hem-ashyane), of the same nest; ^J^** (hem-jlns), of the same
genus;
^j^Jui (hem-shehri), of
fellow-countryman
like;
as,
;
same town or country, a
(Jy(,-i (peri-vesh), fairy-like;
followed by
colour; as,
d
(rang),
ijll
U (fam), or
f
^j
(vesh),
a substantive
of
(gyun),
(sebz-rang), green-coloured ;
fam), emerald-coloured;
(i. e.,
the
of a substantive followed by
all
signifying
^j (zumurrAd-
wheat-coloured
fr^sS (gendum-gyun),
dark-complexioned, brown)
;
of a substantive followed by
or
J\T(kyar, gyar), jT(ger), ^U (ban),
fshirm-kyar), sweet-mannered; J*
>_j\
jS
(dar)
;
as,
;*&
(aferid-gyar), creative
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
71
0x0. X
creator)
e.,
;
O
j^\
(zer-ger),
(bag-ban), garden-keeper
(i.e.,
keeper; or followed
^b
(Istan), all
pen-case
;
by
names of
goldworker, goldsmith
gardener)
(dan),
(muhr-dar), seal-
^LJ
(qalem-dan), a
as, ^1 .xjs
;
O x
^Lcb
;
or
^L. (sar),
(zar),
jj
special places
;j\^^
^
J)JL^= (gy&l-zar), a flower-garden, a flowery mead
jLjtjj (kyuh-sdr), mountainous district;
Arabia; or a substantive repeated;
^LL^c
as,
('arablstan),
eftjrC (chak-cbak),
imitative of the sound of repeated blows with axe or sword
the same, or two different substantives, with
them
as, CiJUXU.
;
a-pa),
from head
to foot;
or with
\J
or
o in
place of the
I
as,
;
Ox xox
(ser-ta-pa),
from beginning
same sense; ^^J^,
to
and day (which
or several nights
(ser-te-ser),
is
all night
and days
pey), step by step, gradatim
on hand, hands crossed;
and
end,
all day, twenty-four hours,
in one succession;
;
as,
some
or with
^^ j-j pey-der-
o-^^ws*.*.^ (dest-ber-dest), hand
&^~m~
(sme-be-sine), breast to breast;
J
O
jjij^Uyj (dush-a-dush), shoulder to shoulder^ back to back;
(ser-be-rauhr), t^z^A <Ae
sealed up
to
unique), JJ^AJ Li (shebane-ruz), meaning:
other Persian preposition between the two;
J X
from end
end; or with ^\ in jj^iLl (sheban-ruz), night
a whole night and day,
O
;
placed between
1
(chakya-chak), same signification, Cj^ (ser-
x xO x
IjlJr-
;
;
x'-i
'
head (or mouth of a bag, bottle, &c.)
or with a substantive and
c
1
^v^**
compound
(bakht-ber-geshte), whose luck
is
adjective
;
as,
reversed; or even
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
72
four words combined; as,
w^ostf
foad
varieties
and
l>
;
s Zi/tedf
up
j^ii dta^**
to the
(ser-be-felek-keshlde),
very spheres
besides
;
^
especially the two privatives in
(na), not
as,
;
manners, unmannerly, impolite
\^*j\j
;
other
(bi), without,
without education or
_> (bl-edeb),
c_o1
many
(na-biina), not seeing, sight-
less, blind.
Some Arabic
epithets in
may be
expressions
Turkish and Persian
lord of the conjunction
(i.
(veli-nl'met), associate
of
sions formed of ji (zu),
as,
benefits
(i. e.,
of which imply possession
e^jtifJj
;
a benefactor)
(zat), JA\ (ehl),
* * f
all
^J^a-a-U (sahlb-qiran),
master of the age)
e., the
oli
;
regarded as compound
expres-
;
and LLJ\
(erbab),
j
as, u\j i ji (zu-zu^abe), possessed
;
of a forelock or topknot, and AjUijj (zu-zunabe), possessed of
"
a following
comet)-,
(i.e.,
f^e possessor
of
the side
J
'
if
-*is)' oli (zatu-'l-jenb, VM/^. satllj.au),
pleurisy)
(i. e.,
;
or in Persian con-
struction; as, jj^cjjtl (ehll-'irz), possessed of honour or virtue,
honorable,
who
virtuous
honest,
possess the chief seat
qualified
of her
with^c
(g^yi')>
than circumscribed
;
j'...^^^!
(i. e.,
(erbabl-mesned), those
high dignitaries)-, or an adjective
other; as, jj.xs^-.fr (gayrl-mahdud),
(i. e.,
unlimited, undejined)
Arabic verb in the aorist made negative with V
\M*I$ (la-yiihsa), not to be counted, innumerable
untold, innumerable
;
z," *
(la-yetejezza),
Oj^V
not
to
(la-yemut),
who
;
(la),
or
an
not;
as,
;
jjoV (la-yu'add),
dies not, immortal
be subdivided, indivisible;
;
or an
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
ibic adjective
o*A*>ii
as,
73
followed by a definite article and substantive
eternal in duration
JjjJl^jjl (ebedlyyu-'d-devam),
;
^LiJl
;
^
o ,QlViO
,'
it
*
(qavlyyu-'l-bunyan), strong in build ; &c., &c., &c.
Every Turkish adjective
that, without
also an adverb
is
verbs as well as substantives
a beautiful stallion;
gracefully.
whether used
own
1^3
The same
adjectives, as
.^j
Turkish or
in
;
Ll.
when used
;
-l\j
cession, successively;
'
As
its
to
walk
Arabic
(hasanan), beautifully.
*o
11
?
.
5 y)'
as,
^Ui
Arabic substan-
Turkish adverbs by being put
;
as,
&
^
( 'ale-' t-te vail),
^c
;
may
be,
and
('an gafletln),
in continued suc-
(fl-'l-haq!qa), in reality, really,
i
oU-ijJlj (bl-'d-defd'at), on several occasions, repeatedly
;
(11-sebebln),
for a reason
;
;
&c.
with substantives, so also every Turkish adjective has
diminutive, formed
-ish, to
^as,
j^
as adverbs
genitive, indefinite or definite, as
by inadvertence
L-.>;ml
^
^o
oT JjjT(gyuzel at),
thus,
Persian phrases.
in
preceded by an Arabic preposition
truly
to say,
Arabic substantives, require to be put in their
by act
own
;
Jj j> (gyuzel yurumek),
tives are also sometimes used as
in their
is
the case with Persian adjectives,
is
accusative case indefinite
(fi'lan),
that
any modification of form, the Turkish adjective
o
qualifies
;
by the addition of the
suffix
<so.
(je, ja),
the word, whether this end in a consonant or vowel
J-lj (yeshll),
green,
o
green; Jj_i
A-sfe (yeshllje),
<>
(qizil) red,
;
greenish, somewhat
Aa^-i (qiziljd) reddish;
o
J
c*J^->
(blyuk)
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
74
x->X
(ufaqja)
(qara)
*t
o
*
largish;
large, **)-*-> (blyukje)
smallish; ^>\ (irl)
/ar<7<?,
(qiiruja) dryish.
(liiji)
AS^J!
^5
>/ac, Aa.s^ (qardja) blackish;
A modification
by substituting a
letters at the
used for the words
00
is
final
c*J
or
(qAri\) dr?/,
A
largish.
O
A-&-JJJ*
O
J
e)j-j
,
J
O x J
JX
csJ^, (J^jl
X
for the s,
^j
end of the radical word, as
csUjo (blyujek),
^
largish;
of this form, dictated by the
O
principle of euphony,
small,
jLs^ (Afaq)
and suppressing those
for substantives
thus,
;
further conformity with the sense
J
J O
of euphony, avoiding two ^ji-yl vowels in succession, makes
,
O J
jja-Ujl (ufajiq)
last
smallish,
and
J>/
va?jx (kuchujuk) smallish
;
this
being doubly euphonic.
These diminutive
express in
adjectives,
as in
every language, often
Turkish the reverse of diminution
in the quality
they represent, being in fact exaggeratives in sense, and meaning very, exceedingly, extremely, &c.
adam
dir),
he
is
as,
;
^
+*\
a bravish man
(i. e.,
SECTION
The Numerals.
III.
*>-jj~>>
(jesurja
a very brave man).
Turkish, Arabic, and Persian numerals, cardinal and ordinal,
are used in Ottoman.
one-tenth.
Arabic fractions are also used as
In this sketch, however, the
numerals alone are explained.
distributive, fractional,
and
five sorts
These are the
indefinite
far as
of Turkish
cardinal, ordinal,
numbers.
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
The
simple Turkish cardinal numbers are
(Ikt)
JoJ
75
two,
(uch)
-^\
three,
oy
seven,
J\\ (altl) six, t^i (yedl)
nine, ^/l (6n) ten,
& (^^
^CC,
01
_J
(durt)/owr,
JXl
(blr) one,
yj
(eeklz) <%/^,
(besh) Jive,
(doqAz)
j^L
(ylylrml) fu;<mfy, jj-jjl (otiiz), thirty,
^Jfj:
JU3T
forty, JJI (elll)//ty,
mlsh) seventy,
:
(altmlsh)
(seksan) e^Afy,
^CiL
^'(yet-
aiarfy,
(d6q^an) ninety,
O
Jj-i
(y^ z )
C
The two
a hundred, duj (bin) a thousand.
O
J
lives, djj
(yfik),
a hundred thousand, and
substan-
JO
^j^lL (rallyin),
a
but they are not true numerals.
They
are names of aggregates, and require the numerals
before
million, are also
used
;
one hundred thousand,
&jij> (blr y&k),
as,
mllyon) one million
U>L
&c.
^jl,
o
o *
o J o
them;
and so on
;
for higher
The French numerals
^j^j
(blr
numbers,
^jlb (bllyin), ^jl
y6n), &c., are sometimes used.
The compound Turkish
built
cardinal
up by putting the units
numerals are uniformly
after the tens
to 99,
up
and by
O J
placing the
word
jj>
before the simple or
compound expression
o J
up
to
199; then by adding the units from 2 to 9 before jy_
up
to
999
;
next by using dLj before these simples or com-
pounds up to 1999; and
finally,
or
up
compounds before
eleven,
^*~
**S"
J^l
^yo
dl
>
to
by again using the simples
999,999
thus, ^Jjl (6n-blr)
o J o J j o J
(ylylrmllkl) twenty-two, rj\jjj\jjl (yuz
C*
ftch) one
;
hundred and
thirty-three,
CO
^ j^
O J
O
.^ +
6tiiz
O
^_X_* dLj
(blii
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR
76
seklz
yuz q!rq besh) one thousand
oOJojoj
o
^
^x x
o
0;Joj!j^i duj^_A-i ^j'l-
hundred and
eight
^i, (beshyAz altmishseklz blnyuz
6n dart) 568,1 14,
dLj J^l ^Cii
JjT^JLJI j^jl
(uch mllyon, yedl yuk, d6qsdn
Ikl
bin,
4111
y^z,
o
When
combinations.
^L ^,1
t^ ^J*
fich
Alt!)
be noticed thatjao conjunction enters these
It will
3,792,356.
forty-five,
x
*
lljjii
.
the foreign expression
J
o
^.
\'
,
or the
o t
treasury word djj
multiples
is
O
O
of
not used, the native method of expressing
J
<*L_)jj3
number of such
is
to
the
state
multiple, and then
*^
o
times, before the
*fS (kerre)
simple or
compound
to intercalate the
o
o
9 J
word dujj^j
J
3
as, c*Lj j^j
;
word
*
*s
^_>
^jj
(yedt kerr4 yfiz bin) seven times one hundred thousand, 700,000
dL->3ji
lXj->\^\j oy
elll Ikl
(durt yuz
;
kerr^ ynz bin)
45,200,000.
The Turkish
interrogative cardinal numeral
is
^U
(qach)
how many ?
The
tives,
cardinal numerals are adjectives
may
is
used as a substantive when enquiring
" what number ? " or " what
is the
" how
dldlnlz)
"
galdl)
to
Even the
be used as substantives, and declined.
interrogative III
or " what
but, like all adjec-
;
is it
day of the month
o'clock ?
?
"
many did you say?"
how many (hours) has
(qich4 verlyirsun)
"
"
or " at what price ?
Thus
:
j->^
(qach
\$& *& ^
the clock
come
?
"
" at how much art thou
selling
ui'
(it,
them)
?
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
)*
^^
Cikl
(ayiii
qachl dir)
77
" the
how-manyeth of the month
it?"
18
The Persian compound
first,
cardinals place the higher elements
as in Turkish and English
but the conjunction j
;
troduced between each two members ;
(hezar
li
as, c^flaj
is
in-
o~o^j c>~jjx ->j jVj
duwist u shast n heft), a thousand, two hundred, and
sixty-seven.
The Arabic compound
tween each pair also
oo^
J o,
o*
cardinals take the conjunction
j be-
but the lower elements stand
;
Jo
^IjtyJUj ^-^.j
elf) the year one
in Turkish,
'Ai- (seae-i tls
;
as,
A khamsin A ml'eteyn u
thousand two hundred and fifty -nine, expressed
.^LjJL
The Turkish
first
x *
e
-*J
$jjL>\
dLj (bin Iklyuz
ordinal numbers are formed
elll
dAqiiz
by adding an
esere
to the last quiescent consonant of the cardinal, simple or
com-
?
pound, followed by the termination ^^jc
first,
.&jyj\ (otiizunju)
^K^
thirtieth,
(blnlnjl) thousandth,
as,
^-j>
Jfi\,
^$> &>}&. ^.
But, in the numbers that end in vowel ^, this
before the same termination
(altinji) sixth,
^f*l
;
(jedlnjl)
as,
>^si
L5
seventh,
O Of
twentieth,
its
final
^.^
(elllnjl) fiftieth.
The
;.
is
suppressed
(Iklnjl) second,
^^Xj
cardinal
^^^
(ylylrmlnjl)
oji changes
into ^ before the ordinal termination; as,
(6n-diirdunju) fourteenth.
(bliinjl)
(yuzunjA) hundredth,
^jy.
^^L
;
JOJOJ
^
O
J
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
78
The Arabic and Persian
may be found
in the lexicons, &c.
The Turkish
dinals
ordinals are frequently used, and
distributive
by making
numbers are formed from the
Astun, and then adding a quiescent
(besher),
J*J
(blrer),
Their sense
is
examples
word
*& (ynzer),
(6tAzer);
expressed
the
numerals, by
Jj^
to the
.
car-
movent with
their last quiescent consonant
as,
;
^
>j>
(blfier).
English, which has no such
in
words each and
will thus be rendered
apiece
;
the
foregoing
one each, five apiece, thirty
:
o
a hundred each, a thousand each.
each,
Q*> c
is
apiece.
the cardinal ends with a vowel, the
syllable^ (sher)
suffixed to form the distributive
o
apiece,
JIJ^
**
o*
o
(Sltisher) six each,
j~l\
'*
as, ^iLjol
;
(Iklsher)
two
-
j~ Q->
(yedlsher) seven apiece,
(ylylrmlsher) twenty each, ^ijUl (elllsher) fifty each.
In the case of more than one hundred or thousand,
cardinal
that designates their
o J
tributive suffix
c*Lj
o
cardinal o,->
J
becomes j*j* (ddrder) four
When
The
;
as, j^j
o +
jX
number
the
clis-
x"
jZ*\
(Iklsher yuz) two hundred each,
jZ> (besher bin) five thousand apiece.
numbers the
it is
that receives the
And
in
distributive suffixes are added to the
compound
numbers of
thousands, of hundreds, and of final units or tens, to indicate
o -
one distribution
blrer) five
;
thus,
G^S'
jj ^J^i
^
**
Jji j~^~
(besher yftz ylylrml
hundred and twenty-one each,j2jf*\
J^j^^^csLj^jC..
(seklzer bin, yedlsher yuz, qlrq Iklsher), 8,742 apiece
(yAz
elllsher),
150 each.
;
^LBl -^
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
The Turkish
79
numbers are very simple. The number
fractional
of the denominator in the locative, and followed by the number
of the numerator
(parts), one;
i.e.
J, the
i.e.
as, j>
;
^\
half;
.x^
(iklde blr) in two
siL (beshde
iki) in five,
o
two;
*
Sometimes one of the synonyms ^U (pay),
f, two-fifths.
*^
(q^m),
^J
^_a. (juz>),
the form
is
numeral of the fraction;
(hlssa) part, is
as,
^CJ^
sjjib
added after each
J^l (ikl payda, blr pay)
in two parts, one part.
The Arabic
numbers are
fractional
Excepting the word uJLi (nisf) a
O OJ
O
of the form Jxi
;
^
vw?^r.
'ushiir)
(sAmn) an
used
;
khums)
as,
OOJ
^j-, (suds) a
//i!A,
two-fifths,
;
*L"
UJI
^G
^lc
('ushr,
used,
JjlLU
the others a Turkish numerator
JJi
^^C;!
(Ikt
4
^>
(besh tus
)
five-ninths, &c.
^li
One
of the adjectives,
(yaii), signify <^e
^,l>
(yarim),
AaZ/ (of one sole
(yarim elma) half an apple, a half apple
lf*Jl fcUlji (elmanin
The
is
*^, (sub*)
special Turkish adjectives and one Turkish
sub.-tantive,
as,
dual of ilj
(i\ch rub') three quarters,
substantive to express half.
thing
The
all
OOJ
szxi/j,
-J (tus') a ninth,
eighth,
but for
;
^,1
There are two
and the
all
O OJ
a fcwM, a <zYA.
(sulsan) two-thirds
is
they are
thus, eJC (suls, vulg. sulus) a third, AJ^ (rub*)
^^ (khums) a
a seventh,
half, the half,
O-J
OO-J
a fourth,
used up to ten.
also
other adjective,
yarfsl),
Ji^J
Me Aa?/ o/ an
(biichiiq),
is
;
(or of the) apple.
used after some whole
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
80
number, never alone
apple
and a
and a
half.
When
as,
;
I*cL,
half,
Ql Ji^>
J^ ^>\
a complex fractional
^
buchuq elma) an
(blr
(Ikl
biichnq sa'at) two hours
number
consisting of an integer
and a fraction other than one-half has
be expressed, the
to
Turkish or Arabic fractions are used, the conjunction J or the
preposition aLl being introduced between the integer and the
fraction
a_^
as,
;
When
fourth.
the Turkish fraction
the genitive
in
*Ll
&"'
u+
o^
(ba'zi)
some
;
o
a few, a
j^=\
&c.
j*
(her) every
j
-
;
-*
ti~
(ekser) the most part
j\ (az) /ew
little ;
:
;
J
;
as,
of one.
-
^ js
;
(her blr)
(hlch blr), no
o
O
o
used, the numeral j>
three-eighths
*
C*
som, a few;
and
& (hlch) no, none;
every one, each;
Ua3a
,jj five,
numerals are
indefinite
is
two and one-
^-^
also introduced before the fraction
is
1^
The
or *jj j> AA
^o!
j> j
*
;
o
~&J.
O^
(blr
qach)
O
jj_. (choq) many; jl^-j
(blr az)
o
>
jj-^ (blr ch6q) a great many, a great quantity;
Of these, jit>
is
always an adjective; the rest are adjectives
and substantives.
There
is
a small series of Turkish numerals of a peculiar
nature, from
triple,
a
j~-jj
trine,
(iktz), twin, twins,
J^ (diirduz)
and perhaps on
to
through ^-^jl (uchuz)
fourfold, to J-jJ (beshlz) five-fold,
\J.I (6niiz) ten-fold.
Adjectives are formed
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
from these
in j)
J O 1
(branches, &c.)
;
possessed of twins, oj twin
as, jJj^jl (Iklzll),
;
81
J
ivith three
j^-jl (Achuzlu)
(lambs, branches,
&c.); &c.
The
1
9,
written digits are
With
0.
.
these,
:
1,
I
r
2,
r 3,
o 5,
i 4,
6, v 7, A 8,
i
compound numbers are written
English, from left to right;
as,
n.
ro 25,
as
n.i
160,
in
3409,
VA..T.H 78003046, &c.
lu dates, the thousand, and generally the hundreds, of the
year of the Hijra are omitted, as also the dots of the letters
stands
A_
thus,
for
*
__.*
in the year (of the Hijra)
;
(sene bin Iklyuz d6qsan aid)
1296
;
b
4uL,
r
i
^
ylylrml blr
(fi
za, sene 97) on the 2\st Zt-'l-Qada, '97 (A.H.).
i-
O
The
>
-.,
;
signs for the months, in dates, are
!,,
for
for-J^f^J
^i VI
o
2
t^iUa-
;
Jf
;
-j,
*
-*
J, for Jlj-i.
b,
;
for
J^f^
for
i_^
o
o^
for 5Xx_kJl
;
as,
A
i^e.
+
*3 \
^i
;
^,
^j
,
<u- \jo
L>
^
;
Not
these shortened numeral dates.
date
is
written out in full words
Jji^LJii
^^ y ii.^
fttl
all
;
as,
for
;
is
;
jj^,
for
^ST^iUL
j, for
^i
^U^
;
;
The day
.
and the
;
->
^^
I
for As?1
(gurre), while the thirtieth
8/c
U,
;
for ^L*^.
^^^j,
always precedes the sign of the month
termed
+, for
:
first
named 11
day
is
(selkh)
;
dots being omitted in
so,
however, when the
O
o
**
J
o J
n
-x"
^Lji-L \jS^\
^l^ ^ }$>
(*L-j
Jo
*--_i'
(Ishbu bin
Iklyuz d6qsan diqiiz sene'l hljrlyyesl mah-i muharremlnln 6n
G
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
82
beshinji penjsbenblh gyfinfi) This day of Thursday, the 15th of
the
month of Muharrem, of
the Hijra year 1299.
The Pronoun.
SECTION IV.
The Turkish
o
o
-.
^
(ben) /,
personal pronoun has no distinction of gender
^
t
(
(san, not sen) thou, j\ (6
o J
jy
in writing, generally,
;
o
o
61) he, she,
j\
and their plurals
it ;
(biz) we, j~* (slz) you,
j*
:
*
(anlar, onlar) they.
In politeness, j-> and j_- are used instead of
They then have
own
their
which cannot be expressed
plurals
is
same way, out of
practised in Italian
^5x3 (kendl)
self,
persons, singular
is
and
but
;
:
Jljt
(bizler),
and c^_-,.
J^
(slzler),
third person plural
is
politeness, for the singular, as
has not
it
a kind of
It
plural.
The
^j
These are even used
in English.
as singulars, by the over-polite.
used, in the
:
J
^
its
common
is
plural.
The word
pronoun, of
specialized
by the
all
the
posses-
sives.
The
personal pronouns, singular and plural, are declined in
the same
way
them have a
as the
nouns substantive, excepting that some of
special genitive,
person, singular and plural.
of me, my;
her, it;
your
esU-,
(sanlii)
his, her, its;
; e)j2l (anlar'iii,
of
^
but those of the second
all
These genitives are:
thee,
thy
talil
;
^ (benlm)
(aniii, 6nu.fi)
of him,
(blzlm) of us, our; c^*, (slzln) of you,
onlarin) of them,
their.
But, to take either
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
o J
of the prepositions
^^1
,
be put in the genitive,
*Ll
^j^\ ^) forme,
^J>-
83
^
A)\
all
,
after their singulars, they
but the third person plural
with you, ^jg]
diil
for him,
her,
must
as,
;
JLil
it, tigl
with them.
These genitives are used, when
required, to emphasize
They
person.
to corroborate
&c.),
are never used alone, without their possessives
;
thus, Job (babam)
~j (benlm babam)
Jj'j
and
number and
corroborate the possessive pronoun of the same
my
my father
my
(not
mother,
father (not your father, or his
father).
The
possessive pronouns, too, have no distinction of gender,
either on the English or
im)
my
;
d
(In, in)
thy
French
^
;
his, her, its
lari),
;
j*
o
(Imlz, imiz) our,
^
jS
1
^
or, after a vowel,
(1, i),
o
They are
principle.
(1m,
(st, s!)
*-
(liilz,
Inlz)
^
your;
(leri,
their.
These possessives are
to the
suffixed
substantives
qualify,
and form one word with them.
word
then declined like a simple substantive
they
That compound
o
(evlm)
my
is
my
house,
house, c*Ujjl (evlmln)
.Uijl
(evimde) in
of
my
here before the bare possessive,
my
house,
house-,
is
t+)J\
&c.
*
thus, vjl
;
(evlme)
(The
<_$
to
added
thought by some to be
needed in the case of a preceding consonant that does not
join on in writing to
do not consider
it
its
next
letter in the
same word.
necessary, and write: +j
,
is)jl,
^1,
Others
&c.; but
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
84
when
after
Ox
the compound, in declension, &c., takes another vowel
it,
CiUjjl
it
more usual
is
add
to
(evlmln) of
(evlnlz) your house
The vowel
my
;
this
preceding vowel also
O
<**
-
my
to
house, A*JJ! (evlme)
house
;
as,
;
-X*"
&c.
that precedes the bare possessive
an e^ere, soft
is
or hard, given grammatically to the final consonant of
qualified
substantive,
ol
horse,
(&t)
a
*
^-V^l
when
Jl (atim)
(at!),
his, her, its horse,
your
horse, ^$jL^\
it
my
ends in a consonant.
horse,
isijt (atln)
the
Thus,
thy horse, J[l
our horse, j_5T_j1 (atinlz)
J^-ft (atlmiz)
After an uturu vowel
their horse.
(atlari)
dominant, this eser& becomes uturu also; thus, Jcjl (6ghAl)
a
son, jicjl (oghiilum)
or
(budiim)
+*j)
face;
J^(gy^
When
is
z)
my
my
thigh;
an eV e
>
j
(yuz)
~a
face,
\j$ (gyuzum) my
to
form a
syllable
be; thus, JCC (babam)
O
(surulerl)
my
his, her, its
(qapusu)
our bayonet;
(yuzum) my
J J "
with that vowel, whatever
door or gate
;
jx^jXJj-,
JlocL
of
^5 after
may
;
(suugyumuz)
>
,
j-$jf (gyurgyuiiuz)
their
it
father; djiib (yanqon) thy echo
i
i
your experience; \j}jjj
The example here
the substantive ends with a vowel,
in lieu
(buti\m)
eye.
given,
shows
possessive singular of the third person,
when
+jji_
Jj
the substantive ends with a vowel, the bare possessive
added
^j*
son; o^j (but) a thigh,
^
is
with the
clearly that
the possessive,
a consonant.
If the final vowel of the substantive
is
B
,
it is
never joined
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
on to the possessive in writing.
d^J
(maternal) aunt,
Tier
aunt
Thus, f*)-^ (teyzem) my
(teyzen), thy aunt, ^-^-J (teyzesl) his or
j+ijl (teyzemlz) our aunt,
;
85
J->J
(teyzeniz) your aunt,
their aunt.
(jJ*)+> (teyzelerl)
When
the final vowel
the third person singular, and in
all
tailor,
d(jjj
Thus,
and
^^J
it
In
the possessive plurals,
Ox
they join on.
first
in writing.
^, the possessives of the
is
second persons singular do not join on to
O
(terzl)
a
tailor,
^Jj^
(terzlii) thy tailor,
O
**
-(^/-J (terzlm)
our tailor,
j**-jj (terzlmlz)
j*.jj> (terzlnlz) your
There
(terzlleii) their tailor.
custom alone has
myself,
issbli
tailor, (j)jjj>
no valid reason for
Thus are formed:
so.
it
is
(kendln) thyself, ^JO-i
my
(terzlsl) his or her tailor,
this rule
;
^j!_T'(kendlm)
(kendlsl) his, her, itself;
J*jjjj(keadlmlz) ourselves, j_5Cx5(kendliilz) yourselves,
^i^
(kendllerl) theirselves.
A
final
^
,
in a polysyllable, as in declension,
c before the possessives, singular or
the third person plural
Turkish
d
mansion,
c5O
his
(qinaghim)
^cl_jj_3
or her fowl
;
;
plural, excepting that of
so also, an Arabic
(y value) in like cases.
(tp^ytn) thy silk
(Ipeyliilz)
;
changes into
cs)
changes into
Thus, jljy (q6naq), a
my mansion ;
Jjli (tawiiq) a fowl,
CiLjl
(^P^k) silk,
^lL (tawughA)
^cljj9 (qonaghimiz) our mansion, ^_x_x_j_jl
your silk;
^JLJJLi
(tawiiqlari)
their fowl.
The
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
86
reason of the exception
no vowel before
is
the final consonant takes
evident,
,jj.
These possessives equally qualify plural substantives, and
follow the sign of the plural.
f
*
*
horses
CiJ^JLJl (itlAiln) thy
your aunts
By
J
^* o
.>
u^jjX-jj- (M\ugyulerl)
;
(sAHUerlmlz) our flocks;
bayonet* ; j*jjjf
iilz)
Thus, +j^ (evlerlm), my houses;
'
his, her, its
Jx^J
(tejzeleii-
jjJijLjji (qonaqlail) their mansions.
;
a consideration of the examples above given with the
possessives
of
the third
persons,
singular
and
as
plural,
attached to singular and plural substantives, two peculiarities
become evident, namely:
when
the possessive
1,
the plural sign
the substantive
is
is
not repeated for
itself plural
;
con-
2,
sequently, the combination of a substantive and a possessive
when
of the third person,
the two, leaves
it
has the plural syllable J> between
altogether doubtful whether this plural sign
it
belongs to the substantive or to the possessive.
^o
-
o
*
Even
is
not the case,
whether
<jja\jj3
it
if
the
J
combination ^JJtLijJ (qonaqlarlerl) had been in use,
would have been impossible
which
to decide
(qonaqlari) was intended to betoken the sense
of his or her mansions, on the one hand, or their mansion, on
the other.
sions,
Add
to this difficulty the third sense of their
and the puzzle becomes
conversation, the doubt of the
necessary, by proper enquiries.
still
man-
more complicated.
hearer
may
be removed,
In
if
But, in a written document,
ACCIDENCE OK ETYMOLOGY.
87
intended to be understood by an absent reader, possibly after
the death of the writer, a method was seen, especially by
judges and
legists, to
be necessary for distinguishing between
the three cases.
That
distinction
is
effected,
in
somewhat
writing,
To
expense of plain grammar, as follows.
the
at
distinguish the
single possessor of the plural possessions, the singular cor-
roborative genitive of the personal pronoun
is
placed before
'
-
the combination containing the plural sign
(anin
qinaqlari)
his
or
thus,
To
mansions.
Tier
;
Of
I
^Jj\jjp dul
the
distinguish
plural joint possessors of a single possession, the genitive of
the
plural
personal
pronoun
is
violated by omitting the plural sign
of substantive and possessive
their mansion.
;
as,
still
ctJ^Lil
be
The
felt,
^'^
is
from the combination
(anlariii
(sJJLjl
qonaghi)
In the third case, the sign of the plural
used in the corroborative and
(jj&\jp
and grammar
prefixed,
in
the combination
(anlarin q6naqlari) their mansions.
;
A doubt
is
thus,
may
and these distinctions are not always used.
declension of the combination with the possessive of
the third person, singular or plural, takes a special form, a
^
being introduced before the prepositions, and the final vowelletter of the original
when
the latter
is
combination suppressed before this
jj,
joined in writing to the combination sin-
gular, or does not itself possess a
vowel
in
the combination
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
88
This
plural.
tives
rule,
applied to possessives joined to substan-
ending respectively
When
^j-i-i
means own;
is
consonants or vowels, acts thus
in
an adjective,
it
remains unchanged, and
thus, .J-jLj ,jj_i_S (kendl
\
' ' '
:
bdbdm) my own father,
s-
".^
JjJl^ (j-'S (kendt viilldelerlnlz) your own mothers, &c.
The Demonstratives.
SECTION V.
These
y
are,
(bA)
ji
this,
that or this,
or
j\ (6)
(shii)
J
o
o
as in the personal) that,j->j\
(61,
other.
(ol-blr)
are used as substantives and as adjectives
They
jy
o j
(6-blr) or ^Jjl
;
the
being
declined or invariable, accordingly, like other substantives and
O^^J
adjectives.
O
O^
C
Thus,
L_jLi_5
that other man,
(bunda),
J#
(bAnldrin),
(l)Anii),
ji are thus
J
j
the personal
or
j\
J^l
J
mn
;
these
books;
&c.
j
substantives, jj and
j
0^7-
^Aos
jX*'
^>\^S j>
J
JU^l^j!
j
As
this book,
OxOx** O
i
*dj>j\
C,O'
y
:
j>
Q J
(bA),
dj^
s-}
8
'^/
xO ^
(biinAn), \^> (bAiia), sjj^
^iljJ (biinddn)
$}> (biinlM),
declined, something like
J
;
jii^J (biinlar),
(biinUrdd),
fl3^
^gJ^J (bAnlarl),
89
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
'
4j4 (bAnlardan)
nounced
jjZ*
shAl),
written Jj_i
^_i (shA, sometimes
;
dii^i
(shAnA), jjJJj^ (shAndan)
larln), sjly,
(shAnHra)
But
^jjl
,
;
Jiijl (shAnlar), isJ^Liji (shAn-
;
tlJijL (shAnlarda),
With
OJ
JjV^ji (shAnldrddn).
put in the genitive
;
Jyjal
and
*Ll
<sli^J
XOJJ
for
this,
to be used as a substantive,
sive suffix of the third person
appended
Or
it
may
O
;
It
;
is
i^j'
(o-blii)
then declined
xOJ
J
J
:
;
as, ^)*i^ji (6-blrtmlz), the other
J
'^-
of the other one of us
us, CiJ)*^jl
you
with that.
take either of the two possessive suffixes of the
and second persons plural
of
i&jZt
to it
J
O
like all similar combinations
dJbl
must have the posses-
other one, the other one (of the two).
its
(shAnlari),
i^ij
their singulars are
CJJ
as, ijjg\
pro-
sjjji (shAnda),
(shAna),
(shAnAfi), tf^
,
in the other ones
8-^i^jl
;
of us
f
)>o/j^
to
^e
first
one
other one of
the other ones
tjjf>.jj>j\
of you; &c.
SECTION
who ?
^p (klm)
such, singular and
* O
^>"
*+5
in
whom
is
The Interrogates.
always a substantive, and declined as
plural: du-T^of
^
?
VL
,5-*^
whom
whom ? whose? ^jfto ivhom?
O X O ^X*
? ^.U-P
who, ivhat or which persons ? &c.
of or from ivhom
?
90
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
what
AJ (ne)
it
? is generally a substantive,
also used as an adjective,
is
(nenln) of wliat ?
<ui
what? ^AJ
what (accus.)
what
?
(neyl)
'^ (forJJ,
and
is
(for A>>, neye) to
neler)
?
u ij
and declined
then invariable
what
(for
;
:
but
eJoAi
? *** (uede) in
JpJ, nedan) from
what (things)?
what
d^i (nelerln) of
(things); &c.
Ox
jjus
which ?
(qangi, vulg. hang!)
is
both substantive and
declined or invariable accordingly.
adjective,
These three words, as substantives, take the possessive
suffixes.
Thus,
*P
(klmlm) my who ? ^AJ (nem) my what
dH
aJU-^(klmlS) thy who ?
its
wliicli
which,
sons?
(one) of
(nelerlm)
jyjjj
my
it
?
(nen) thy what ?
^--^
^.+^-S (klmlerlm)
?
(q^Qg^l)
my what
per*
what things? J-iiJ (qangfmlz) which
(one) of us ? jCJLiJ (qangilerlnlz) which (ones) oj you ?
(qangileii) i^AzcA (one, or,
i
J
or
Jiij
(vuZ^r.
which ones) of them
Dilqadar)
Ao^ mwc7^
are both sub-
?
>
JrJ
j*
?
AJ
(vulg.
ne turlu) w/iaf sort ?
SECTION VII.
THERE
stau tives
and
adjectives.
The Relative Pronoun.
NO RELATIVE PRONOUN
is
\
IN
TURKISH, though
attempts are made to use the Persian relative and conjunction,
A-3 (kl), as such, in literary composition.
junction *_)
is
a very different thing.
The Turkish
Its use
con-
by Europeans
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
pcans
and others, as a
This
avoided.
is
relative
pronoun,
all
pronoun
Aryan and Semitic
It is the perfection of language.
tongues.
The numerous
active and passive participles of the Turkish
The
verb obviate the necessity of a relative.
ticiples take the place of our relative
is
greatly to be
is
avoidance of all use of the relative
the prime distinction of Turkish from
to a verb
91
when
it
active
is
par-
nominative
and the passive participles do so when our relative
;
the accusative, or any indirect object of a verb.
(See this
explained in the paragraphs on the Participles, in Section VIII.,
on the Verb.)
There
a peculiar Turkish relative, however, to which
is
have no parallel
in English,
the suffix
^
It
(kl).
to nouns and pronouns substantive in two ways.
stantive be in the genitive, the combination
and indicates that which belongs
CC
,
<sUC\j
,
,^32CV
the) father,
father,
J^SL
i \i\i
(bab&siuinkl)
father, his father's one
locative
case,
the
;
&c.
combination
sometimes an adjective.
indicates
a substantive,
(the substantive)
the one
(babamiilkt)
The
attached
If the sub-
(babantnkl) the one which belongs
JC5CCC
(
to
is
is
we
;
thus,
to
a (or
which belongs
to
my
the one belonging to his (or her)
If the substantive be in the
is
sometimes a substantive,
substantive combination then
that which exists in (the simple substantive)
adjective combination expresses the
(substantive) which
;
the
exists
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
92
in
(the
first
substantive).
(babarndekl) the
Thus, ^-SsjJo
thing, the one that exists, that is in (the possession or
my
of)
father, which
my
Jc
father has or holds;
keeping
^_$8.XJ~,\jl)
(babasindekl 'Him) the science possessed by his father, that is in
The
his father.
are declined
With
a
;
substantive combinations form the plural, and
the adjective combination
is
invariable.
noun of place or of time the same
particle, ^j,
forms
a relative combination, substantive or adjective, having relation to the place or time
named.
place, the locative preposition
the foot, or lower part,
plil
is
at the foot;
-i
In the case of the noun of
may
also be employed.
CcU) and
the evening,
^ol
Thus,
sj^cU.! that which
that which
was or
will be (present) in the evening.
SECTION VIII.
As
The Derivation of
the Verb.
a general rule, each primary Turkish verb forms, itself
included, a system of twelve affirmative, twelve negative, and
twelve impotential verbs, by regular derivation
all
;
one half being verbs
active, the other half
the active verbs being transitive or intransitive
having
thirty-six in
;
verbs passive;
;
the passives
for their nominative the direct or the indirect object
of the transitive, the indirect object only of the intransitive
primitive.
In another mode of subdivision, on the other hand, these
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
two equal
thirty-six verbs divide into
93
classes, in pairs,
each pair being simple, and the other causative (which
permissive, as the sense
may
also
show).
Each simple and causative
indeterminate, or reciprocal
one of
is
;
pair of verbs
so that,
is
either determinate,
by a special division of
the same thirty-six, there are twelve determinate, twelve indeterminate, and twelve reciprocal verbs
imperatives of each, for economy of space)
;
:
thus (giving the
94
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
5
a
-
^^
s
"
"
"c
JMI ^
-S
"a,
s
j;
^
i. 1
s>
5
::>
j
S
^
^B
^
O
r-i
I
^"8
O
1
5,
I II
#
a
a,
^
-^
J
^
2
J^^
^ "^
:
8
.;
J
"a
t
'q- -^
S-
s
R "
n
ii
Ul
W
'^J
?i
.~
^
-^
cc
I S
O
aATXV93NJ
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
95
S
-o
S
-2
CL
^o
"***
^>
'i
"S
o
S
'
o
o<
2
,
=>>
to
-2
kick
zj
unable
&a 1
-a
^N
a
~
-S
CC
cc
"l>\
^*s>
o
1
-0)
<W
.52
ually
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
96
Remarks on
The
the foregoing Table.
the root, or simplest form in the
is
imperative singular
conjugation, primitive or derivative, of the
This conjugation
unique for
all
Turkish verb.
the thirty-six forms, as will
consists in adding certain vowels
be seen further on
and con-
sonants to the end of this conjugational root.
When
the conjugational root of the simple affirmative form
ends in J
,
instead of
J
or in a vowel,
Thus
.
its
passive by adding
^
(bul) find, JJ> (biilun, the uturu
Jy
:
forms
it
dominating) be found; %\i (qapla) cover, ^^LlS (qaplan) be
covered;
jij\
^j\
(6qii) read,
In the fore-
(6qun) be read.
going case of the vowel-ending, the passive sometimes takes
O
both the
^ and
the J
the
,
u
nJ
sr '
o
always preceding
-
J j
o
xo
thus, Ji^lS
;
J
-
(qaplanil, as i^blS), be covered, JijSjl (oqunul, as ^jijl) be read.
When
syllable,
the root of the simple affirmative has more than one
and ends
by adding a
in
letter
(ql^al) become
J
o
shorter; shorten
make or
let
(it)
;
or a vowel,
c-JUi (ql-alt)
J
O
its
let
;
spoken or said (by him)
let (it)
\.
j*
O O
Thus, Jlli
.
let
J
(it)
become
J
O
4ijj-
(suweyle) speak, say,
(him) speak or say, make or
;
formed
is
(uksur) cough, c^j... ^-*j\ (uks\\rt)
J J
make or
causative
make or
J
^^=>jl
(him) cough
(sAweylat) make or
,
in lieu of the syllable
shorter,
O
^
,
o
e-Juij-*.
let
J
(it) be
J
^Jjl (oqu) read, recite, OjJjl (6qAt)
be read or recited (by him),
make (him)
read.
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
97
simple affirmative verbs ending in consonants also
Many
form their causatives in
times written J>
J
preceded by a servile esere, some-
,
and even j
,
,
with uturu
not in
;
^
No
.
rule appears to exist on this subject, and the dictionary alone,
or experience, can help the student in
O
O
drink
(it),
j^\
(by him);
oU
sink
^e
(it)
-.Is
;
(qdch)
make or
j*\i (qdchir)
drunk
(it) be
make or
(thou), j\* (batir)
flee, escape,
let
let (it)
make or
let
sink,
(him)
or escape.
When
is
(b&t)sm&
Thus, g\ (Ich)
'
it.
J
(Ichlr) or jjg] (Ichur)
the simple verb, affirmative, negative, or impotential,
transitive, its causative
governs the same accusative
;
and
the nominative to the simple then becomes a dative to the
causative.
000***
^1
eJ-j^li
written by
or
Thus,
>
^
When
^
^
/
(ben ani yazdim)
wrote
(sau anl bana yazdirdin) thou madest
me (thou causedst
me write
lettest
+*j\-i
O x
to
me
the writing
it),
it
to
it,
be
thou madest
it.
the simple verb
is
neuter,
its
oJ
nominative becomes
t J
/ slept,
the accusative of its causative ; as,
p-^ijl (uyidum)
s
o Jo
J
Ox
(san benl Ayiitdun) thou madest or lettest me
djjgjl ^j
-9
^
sleep.
An
indefinite series of causatives of every
formed by repeating the causative
after
o.
They
suffixes,
o
verb
after
may be
^, and j*
are sometimes useful, but are generally used
QXO
in irony
;
each augment adds an agent to the chain
;
H
as,
*
j^G
,
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
98
^C
thing)
two
indeterminate
More
uses.
nification
is
generally
Thus duLl
lies
is,
It has
to kick one's feet or heels
jjt-'J^
(baqlumaq)
man
is,
to
in a passion, a
look
times,
this
agent
is
form
either
is
the
that the act
direct
done
dying
and
But, at other
and then indicates that the
transitive,
is
about
about, here
a perplexed or inquisitive manner; &c.
action,
to
has the same intransitive sig-
it
or stands (like a dancer, a
animal, &c.);
there, in
io cause (a
then performed without any determinate
exterior object.
or
also,
of the
to or for the agent's self.
Thus,
indirect
object,
JO
JLS (qilij
j^jlijs
isUijjJ j\
(glylnmek)
put on
qushanmaq)
to
gird a sword on
(ev edhimek) to acquire
(qashlnmaq)
to
means
ast
caused (by a third)
with the simple form, as to the action, but betokens
is
O xC *
*
to be
also called the Reflexive form.
that this action
as one
*kis
;
(by a fourth agent).
be written
The
'
caused (by a second)
to be
to
put on one's
put on my boots
one's self;
scratch one's self (with one's nails)
to
boots,
a house for
to one's self;
-*!
CiUlp
clothes, CiUi-v**)*>> (chlzmd glylnmek)
^ilS^^^i^^
;
;
j
(chlzmalerlml glylueylm)
let
me
&c.
Passive verbs of neuters are defective
in the third person singular only,
and
person and number exercise no influence.
such that the neutral action takes place
;
they are conjugated
in inflexions
They
in, to,
over which
signify, to be
for, by, on account
99
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
of,
&c. (as expressed), something named, as the act of some or
any indeterminate agent.
Thus, jjLJ
<si-jjj
(buyle teplnllmaz)
+
QS.O
the act
of kicking about
z's
not thus performed, jJuJ
teplnllmaz) the act of kicking about
We
be
fought for
sense of
(burada
as, to be slept in,
;
passive verb always has, inherent in
able.
will be cut (then),
not eaten (as a rule),
(either
J
to
&c.
;
to be
+
not allowed here; &c.
have such passive verbs in English
The Turkish
it
is
+
*i\jj>
Thus, ^_L.T(ke=lllr)
it is
it
cuttable (always);
it is
cut
it,
(often),
j^j (yenmaz)
will not be eaten (then),
it is
the
it
is
not eatable
now, or by nature).
SECTION IX.
The Turkish Conjugation.
All Turkish affirmative verbs, active or passive, transitive
or intransitive, are conjugated in one
and
the same invariable
manner, modified, as to their servile vowels and consonants,
by the laws of
class
and euphony
alone.
The
negative and
impotential verbs differ from the affirmative, as to conjugation,
merely in the form of the aorist active participle, and of the
analogous aorist tense indicative.
So that only one
sole con-
jugation exists, in reality, in the Turkish language.
The
conjugation consists of one simple and three complex
categories
of
moods, tenses, numbers,
verbal nouns, and gerunds
;
ajl
persons,
participles,
four categories, simple and
100
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
complex, being fundamentally
but each modified
alike,
in
a
certain special manner, to express a modified variation of the
action.
Each category has
necessitative,
moods
six
optative
(also
:
the imperative, indicative,
subjunctive),
and
conditional,
infinitive.
The
imperative
The
indicative has eight tenses, in four pairs
and imperfect
perfect
;
The
;
mood has one
tense, the future.
the aorist and past
;
the
;
the present
perfect
and
plu-
the future and past future.
necessitative, optative,
and conditional, have one pair
The
each, the aorist and past.
infinitive has
but one tense,
the present.
Each category has
is
five active participles; the
present (which
the general active participle, applicable, in one sense, to
any
time, past, present, or future), the aorist, the past, the
perfect,
and the future.
the perfect or
passive,
European languages
and
and
is
different
;
are
each
is
not
confused
distinct in
from the gerund
in sense, different
The
In Turkish, the present or active,
together
as
in
form and in sense,
in form, as it
IP,
in
grammar
from the verbal noun.
active participles of the passive verbs denote the direct
recipients of the action of verbs transitive
ticiples of the
same apply
;
the passive par-
to the indirect objects thereof.
The
active participles of the passives of iutransitives denote the
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
indirect objects of the intransitive action
ticiples of
101
the passive par-
;
such passives are not in use.
Between the
five active
and two passive
participles of each
category, a Turkish conjugation thus furnishes twenty-eight
these numerous
use of
By
the
avoids
all
for every verb, primitive or derivative.
participles
it
participles,
entirely
necessity for a relative pronoun.
The
jjl
,
present active participle adds an ustun and the letters
or only the letter
^
,
to the root that ends in a consonant
the aorist adds a vowel and the letters
with an
J^
(
^
with an uturu,
esere, for
or only the letter^,
and^
and the
letters
dki
or J^AJ
(&!>*}
,
(ejek) or
Ife
jL
(tepllan),
^,1J
;
it
and
in
^
^
as,
^
(teplnllan),
add the ustun and ^1
into 1 before the letters ^1
(6turdan),
(tepdlk)
;
^,\,JJ
;
as the
;
roots, including the
;
(tepdlrllan), &c.
;
eU^" (t^j^k), diil*?
^J
(teplnan),
and J,llJ
(
(tepl-
(teplshilan),
The
causatives
while those in
o change
^J-J
thus,
(qiran)
(tepan), ^j^-S
are those of the simple affirmative derivatives.
Ji
the past adds
(&j&q) to consonantal roots,
Thus,
are present active participles
in
;
future adds an ustun
with ustun, to vowel
negatives and impotentials.
shan),
The
(diq).
,
only (or sometimes^)
(mlsb, mish) to all roots, whatever their ending
jp
;
o
which no rule can be given
perfect adds e*b (dik) or
and
,
o
o
with an ustun,
.1
a \*jjj\
(tepdlran),
JLJj (tepmish)
(tepmeyejek),
;
fi
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
102
(tepemeyejek), the final
i
of the negative particle <u being
elided as useless.
When
the root ends with a vowel, as
the case with
is
the negatives and impotentials, the syllable
^G
added
or
in
the present participle, the final
being suppressed, and by some even the
1
;
(yan, yan)
^
is
of the root
but the j
is
kept
Thus, ^G^Lli or (jCLU (qaplayan), ^L^J (tepmeyan),
intact.
O-JJ
Ox'-'X
u L*ajJ
O
J
-
*
(yuruyan), ^Ij^jl (6qiiyan).
(teplnemeyan), J*jj
The Turkish
present active participle, in colloquial lan-
guage, as a remanet from eastern Turkish, takes after
preposition
as,
all
,>
de, da, to
it
the
form an adverb of past or future time
;
sjjxi (gldaude) when (I, thou, &c.) went, or shall go.
The
aorist active participle, of the
same form as the third
person singular of the aorist tense of the indicative, always
ends in a
letter^,
in negatives
in affirmatives,
and impotentials.
and
in the
Thus, ^J
syllable^* (maz)
(teper), j+*> (tepmdz),
UA-J (tepemez).
In the simple affirmative, the vowel added to the
sonant of the root, to which the final ^
cannot be defined by rule.
Of course,
have ustun, others
;
;
all
hard verbs add
soft
but different verbs
esere, others again uturu, for their
and with the ustun,
verbs
then appended,
must be hard or
it
according to the dominant in the root
is
last con-
1
,
as do
while other soft verbs dispense with this
vowel
some
letter.
;
soft
Thus
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
we have: J(^
j^(gelur, vulg.
The
rally
1
aorist in
its
The
pronounced as eser& and^).
We
(s&nur, vulg. sauir),
(slyirlr).
simple reflexive forms
the same.
O
^
gellr),
j^U
(glder),
j
(qirdr),
103
j^
have, therefore,
uturu and
jj (gene-
simple reciprocal does
(teplnur, vulg. teplnlr),
'
j^
All the simple and causative
(teplshur, vulg. teplshlr).
passives follow this rule
(teplntlur, tepldllr),
dlrlllr),
;
thus, jj-LJi (tepllur, teplllr),
]&
(tAplshllAr, teplshlllr)
This
these words.
is
^
a mechanical rule.
The same
rule
is
J
in
The preceding j
is
follower
its
reason for the addition of that ^,
when
applied by
(tep-
It will
intercalated before the
is
a letter that does not join on to
vowel.
J^
(teplshdlrlllr).
Jj^j-J (teplndlrlllr^^jij
be observed that a vowel
;
j^^>
this is the sole
;
the following J has a
many
to the
j of the
has
vowel, as
o
causative
it
.j
,
in like cases
always has in the
therefore be written,
no
effect
The
that
;
when
j$*j>^
,
and the future passive
future active: e)jJ (tepdik)
There
its
.,
;
but this has
same form
as the active
jjl^J^l*)
on the pronunciation.
aorist passive participle has the
perfect,
it
The words above given may
aorist.
j^^
is,
;
d^AJ
are three verbal nouns
formed by adding
negative imperative
<u
;
identical in
is
;
form with the
(tepejek).
the
present
or general,
(me, ma) to the root, exactly like the
the perfect, identical in form with the
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
104
and
perfect active
aorist passive participles
two future
identical with the
djj
(tepdlk)
(^P^ k )- The
d.*2
;
present verbal noun
participles.
;
and the future,
Thus, A^J (tepme);
form *^J (tepme) of the
also that of a verbal adjective passive,
is
signifying done, made, effected as the result of (the action of
thus, A*J, as such adjective,
the verb);
means caused by a
kick or kicks.
This derivative of the transitive verb active simple and
causative can also take the passive sense
which naturally means an
x 3
O
act of being cut;
It
cut.
as,
O
verb
is
transitive
cut tobacco
transitive
;
;
and
as,
;
as,
-t
1
(kesmesl qolay)
x O <x-
O
^\i\i
is
it
easily
when
the
'
*s?\ (inje kesme tutun) finely
as an active adjective
JU jJU
an
also
(
as a passive adjective
^y *>
(kesme),
means
*V X'
^ ^S
<jVjS
A+J
thus,
cutting, often
of
x o
much used
also
is
act
;
when
the verb
in-
is
(babadan qalma mal) property
remaining from (one's) father.
Leaving the gerunds
into the
for the present,
mode of formation of the
before doing so,
we must
we may now
inquire
tenses of each mood.
But
indicate the differences that serve
clearly to distinguish the active participles, the passive parO
ticiples,
and
and the verbal nouns, of the two forms
in (*L.
In the
or
first
in
eb
O
or
jp
,
j..
place, the participles are adjectives, while the
verbal nouns are substantives.
Therefore, whenever a deriva-
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
105
tive in either of those forms qualifies a substantive,
a participle;
cannot be a verbal noun.
it
name of
Secondly, the active participle qualifies the
actor only.
It
;
as,
o
he
who
its
therefore always a simple and invariable
is
word, like the other active participles
is there
must be
it
any man who has gone
there? <yy*
**\ tfj0
^jj
c
*
^^
o
-
x
^ art
tiiJb-*J-3
4^1
thou
go ?
is to
Thirdly, the passive participle always qualifies the
name of
the direct object, or of the indirect object, of the action, and
is
always accompanied by a possessive pronoun indicating the
The
actor of that action.
first
of these two facts distinguishes
the passive participle from the verbal noun
tinguishes
Thus, ujlLj
(oqudughum
+so_*y3j\
O
(now or formerly)
book which
I am
*
^
O
x
going
direct object qualified.
(klt^bi
read
which
(i.
read.
to
e.
So,
xx
^Lj
the second dis-
kltiib)
(uyuyajaghim
the
(6quyajaghim kltab)
These are instances of the
O J
J J J
^Ljojsjl
(oqudughiim zemfin)
(jJis?
6da) the
room
in
^^
^^i j*j\
the meeting in which
are instances of indirect objects
the book,
which I read
the book
J J
when) I read ; and
6quyajaghim mejlls)
*Ljjl *ia.jjj)jl
*"
i_jbj Juujpj\
;
O
the time in
;
from the active participle of the same form.
it
I am
;
as
which I
going
is
am
to
also
going
to sleep.
As
instances of the substantival nature of the verbal noun=,
O
let
us take,
^
J
*
^^**i**&j\
m
f
<Jj\l
(y^
yazdighimi gyurd&nuz-
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
106
mu) have you
seen
past action of writing writing?
my
you ever seen me write
?
-J
^^Lj-
suweyledl) who mentioned
my future
told (you, him, &c.) that
I was
i.
action of coming ?
to
klm
(galejeylml
^^jCa.Js
about
have
e.,
i.
who
e.,
come ?
Proceed we now to discuss the formation of the tenses.
The
in
third person singular
the
the root of each tense, except
Leaving the numbers and persons
imperative.
future consideration,
is
we may
the second tense in each pair, of every
imperative and the infinitive),
is
mood (excluding
formed from the
of the pair by the addition of the auxiliary
it,
we may
for
say, in the first place, that, as
^^\
leave these second tenses also
first
tense
was, after
(Idl)
for
the
future
con
sideration.
By
these means
we
arrive at the conclusion that there are
four tenses in the indicative,
optative, conditional,
and
and one each
infinitive,
in the necessitative,
the forms of which have
to be defined.
The
four
indicative
are
tenses
the
present,
the
aorist
(present habitual and future promissive), the perfect, and the
future
aorist
;
the single tense of the other three
(present or future);
and that of the
moods
is
infinitive
their
is
its
present.
c *
The
present indicative adds an esere and the syllable ^y_
(yor) to the consonantal root
;
thus,
^J
(teplyor).
It indi-
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
cates a present action (actual or habitual)
now
he
Add
kicks.
habitually
;
107
he
is
kicking (now)
;
the auxiliary ^jj) to this,
3
\3>\jj~j (teply6r
A
ing (then).
and
Icll),
o
final
d^X ^j/(gldlyAr);
The
forms the imperfect, he was kick'
it
more frequently changes
es&J
,
form of the servile
in the affirmatives,
.
and
and impotentials, being
in the negatives
in \*
as,
syllable,
(rnez,
maz)
identical with the
It indicates a present habit
active aorist participle.
;
(AdlyAr); Ac.
j^J
aorist indicative varies in
but always ends in
to ^
(not a
present action), or a future assurance, a future promise, as the
context or circumstances
kicks
;
he shall or will kick
will break
;
he reads;
j+J
may
jjj$. (yurur)
J^J
;
lie
(tepmaz) he does not kick
The
;
Thus, ^J (teper) he
(qirar) he breaks
walks
he will read;
jjo\
he cannot kick.
require.
he will
;
(isiiir)
walk
he bites;
he will not kick
auxiliary ^Jjl
,
added
;
he shall or
;
jjSjl
(oqur)
he will bite;
j*aJ (tepemez)
;
to this, forms the
past tense (showing a past habit, or an unfulfilled condition)
^jjJ^J (teper
idl) he
used
to kick
;
he would kick (if
he would have kicked (had he been able); in
senses, the expression is a virtual negative
cause he
is
not able
;
:
;
he could);
which two
last
he kicks not, be-
he did not kick, because he
was not able
;
0^ Cf
l^Jjl)*J (tepmaz Idl) he used not to kick; he would not kick (if
he could);
he would not
(tepemez
Idl) he
have kicked (had he been able);
used not
to be able to
kick
;
he would
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
108
not be able to kick (if so
to
and
so)
he would not have been able
;
kick (had not so and so); &c.
The
perfect indicative
is
formed by adding the syllable
(dl, di), in all cases, to the root.
and also
in
kicked (then)
all
^ jjl ^ J-AJ
;
The
he
^jj
Thus,
the pluperfect results
had not
future indicative
and passive future
is
tional root
is
identical in
and the past future
unable
changes
to ^
O
sonant
The
^
to kick.
form with the active
:
and a
kick
Final
o
;
he
about to
is
the auxiliary ^jjl
was going
^jjl
t!*L.du..<iJ
in the root
,
to kick,
he
was
generally
vowel requires the addition of a con-
O^^JJ
^
dla.jjl
final
to
by the conjuga-
not going to kick;
is
Add
results ^jjl isU.AJ he
he was not going
,
had not
he
^J^J
d^aJ
thus,
;
(sL^A-j+J he
be about to kick.
to
Add
and with the future verbal
about to take place
&si~>iJ he will not be able
isI.A-*J!
(tepdl) he
been able to kick.
participles,
kick, he is going to kick;
to
^jjl ^jJf (tepdl
:
It indicates that the action expressed
noun.
^L
past time.
or ^JjJJ (tepdidl), he had kicked; ^Jol
kicked
^i
used in a determinate,
he has kicked (without defining when).
;
the auxiliary ^Jjl, and
(>\
is
an indeterminate past sense, referring the action
a given past time, or to
idl),
It
,
dla-AJ^ji.
aorist necessitative is
(mell, mali) to the root.
perform a future act
;
formed by adding the syllables
It indicates a present
duty to
and corresponds with our must or ought.
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
Thus, jUJ he must
kick, he ought to kick
kick, he ought not to kick
With the auxiliary
JUJ
}\
UJ
we have
,
he must not
_jLA*J
jULjJ' he ought not
;
<j->\
he ought to
;
109
the
to be able to kick.
past necessitative,
have kicked, he should have kicked;
he ought not to have kicked
;
^jj) jUU-sJ he ought
not to have been able to kick.
The
vowel
is
optative
formed by adding an ust&n and
to a consonantal root, or a syllable
5
vowel
is
aorist
Sometimes
root.
1
used in place of
is
a quasi-imperative, implying optation, or
Thus, AJ (tepe)
let
him
kick,
with suppression of the
tL+j (tepmeye,
him not kick,
(tepemeye)
may
may
able to kick.
he not kick
;
(that) he
.
it is
may
not kick
the auxiliary ^jol
,
(tepe
Idi,
;
kicked;
had not kicked
he not been able to kick, if he
he
had not been
The
any
not be
;
thus,
;
that he
if he
had
had not
^j^^iJ (tepemeyeydl) had
had not been
able to kick
;
that
able to kick.
aorist conditional is
(se, sd) to
let
A-*A*!>
more frequently written and pronounced
tj^j&^S (tepmeyeydl) had he not kicked,
that he
;
and we form the
tepeydi) had he kicked, if he had kicked ;
kicked
;
may
past tense, a virtual negative, expressive of regret
A*J
kick
of the negation)
may
a
tense
a subjunctive.
he not be able to kick; (that) he
Add now
The
(that) he
he kick;
may
(y&, ya) to
AJ
formed by adding the syllable A-
root, consonantal or vowel.
This performs the
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
110
function of our conjunction
(eyer),
can be placed before
if,
As a
tense-ending.
action
;
A^J (tepse)
(tepemese)
he not
able
have the past conditional, which
O ^ Ox
Thus,
^
-v. ,.. ;
;
to
o
A.. <4
;
were
not,
be
he kick!
that
desiderative,
a subjunctive
admits the possibility of the
if he kick, if he were to kick
should
is
really
virtually denies the occurrence.
it
of negation elided) if he kick
is
it, it
it
present,
as a future,
appearance; but, as
in
if,
lie
(tepmese, the
not to kick
kick.
With
&c.
Thus,
;
it
(j>\ added,
we
always a virtual negative.
is
*Q*
(tepseydl, for
kicked ; (53 -...
<J.JJ!A.~*J)
had he kicked,
if he
present of the infinitive
or jj* (m&q) to any root.
quently written with
to end the root
1
as,
;
,
is
<sXUJ
(gltmek q^lmtlqdan evla)
*
verbal noun
in
-m#
.3!
<*
;
as,
to kick
;
,3*^
fre-
c^**^ (tepmemek), for dI<uJ'
,
for
by the verbal noun
,
T
and sometimes without a vowel-letter
in -ing
<70m<7 zs
after
it
dLA**J
;
to
;
i^^er
;
JIitt (qaplami-
This tense
maq), j**4jijl5 (qaplayamdmaq).
takes the suffix dJ
.
formed by adding du (mek)
negative and impoteutial are
duUill, BtUl*^ (tepememek),
in English
*
to kick.
Thus, c*UJ (tepmek)
The
to cover.
had
Ox"x^
(tepmeseydi) had he not kicked ; ^*. w
<
(tepemeseydl) had he not been able
(qaplamaq)
A-~AJ
Sometimes
O^^ox
The
>
as,
Maw
is
often rendered
Jjj cpiJU
staying.
form an equivalent
00*0
(iKi_i an acf of going.
There are seven gerunds, one gerund-like verbal
i*llL_$
It also
to
our
locution of
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
and six
cause, one of verbal proportion,
1
1
1
to indicate various
All of these gerunds and
times in relation with the action.
gerund-like locutions presuppose the occurrence of two actions
expressed in the sentence, one by the gerund, the other by a
The gerunds
subsequent verb.
are a kind of verbal con-
junctions, while the gerund-like locutions are verbal adverbs.
The
first
gerund, the most
uturu, followed by
(yub, yub)
frequently used, ends in an
(ub, ub) after a consonant, or
L_>J
after a vowel.
It indicates that
by
i_jj-j
two actions are
IxMng mentioned, of which the one implied by the gerund
prior as to time or natural sequence.
English, express
junction and, though
breaks, will kick
break
we
Turkish does.
as the
and
relation of
this
(it).
The
letters
its
two actions by the con-
Thus, J^S ujjJ (tepub qirar) he kicks
(it)
;
or, kicking (it), he will
Conversationally, this gerund
and with
;
second gerund
is
p
is
pronounced with
in place of
i_>
;
as, teptp,
formed by adding ustun, and the
d^s (erek) or j^s (araq), to a consonantal root, d,<u (yerek)
+
to a vowel-root.
J^AJ (yaraq)
of the
is
usually, in
&c.
qlrip,
o+
more
occasionally use our gerund in -ing,
and break
eser& in lieu of uturu
or
We
first
It
is
sometimes used
in lieu
gerund, to obviate its too frequent recurrence
distinctive use is to indicate that, of
;
but
two contemporary
sustained actions expressed, the one, subsidiary, accompanies
o
the other.
.X'
Thus, ^JJLJ
-
-'
-*
(2)ju>
kicking, he went off;
i.
e.,
he
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
112
went o/, kicking away
laughing
The
(all
the time)
(all
d^^a
^jJ^
;
he came,
the time).
third gerund, in &* (inje, Inja), after a consonant, or
u&. (ylnje, yinja) after a vowel, and the fourth (used in writing
and much more
only,
rarely), in c*li (Tjek) or jjk (ijaq) after
^A (yijaq)
a consonant, dl^J (yij^k) or
sense that
its
action
is
after a vowel, has the
to be a kind of signal for the occur-
rence of the other expressed in the sentence
rendered by our on
...
(with a verb).
61a)
(that
^jj ^JT(gyArunj&
Thus,
;
jUl
j,l
fifth
gerund
tive, repeated.
identical in
is
qlrdl), kicking,
The
c
(and) kicking
sixth gerund
the Persian
.
d
is
known
reaches), be (it)
form with the aorist opta-
(it),
means
*~>
(tepe tepe
(it).
d
(y value), and the
the verbal reason
o
because he kicked,
*J
the infinitive with esere and ^> added
o
*
Thus, ..J^lj
The seventh gerund
(j^
Thus,
he broke
softened into Turkish
It expresses
second action.
e.,
it
It expresses repetition of one act as a
to the performance of a second.
i.
(vasll 6Hjaq, ma'-
J^l J*
on reaching (as soon as
tepdl) on seeing
).
The
into
may, then, be
(with a gerund), also by our as soon as
...
(him), he kicked (him)
lum
it
;
^"
o*
o
^
ur,^
j
precedent for the
* ox
j
:
J
v
;
he kicking,
I fled ;
I fled.
expresses the beginning of a time com-
mencing with the occurrence of an action and lusting
until
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
during which another action has repeatedly or con-
now,
tinuously occurred
In form
it is
(14) or
j
113
J
gerund
equivalent to our ever since
is
the fifth gerund (not repeated) with the syllable
(11)
added to
ever since he kicked,
The
it
;
lie
it.
Thus,
^Q
has limped.
causal gerund-like locution
equivalent to the sixth
is
with
It is the infinitive,
in sense.
JlaJ (tepelu aqsayor)
softened down, and with the preposition
its final
A>\
consonant
added,
(lie, ila)
XO, xOx
and shortened into
No
ing.
A)
Thus, A*-> (tepmeyle) by
(le, la).
agent of the verb
then expressed in the verb,
is
XO, xOX
though
it
be so exteriorly
There
ing.
is
Ox
J_J ^
as,
;
noun
O
(dan) are employed.
O -
O^
my
kicking,
Thus,
kick-
and
suffixed possessive pro-
>-
^
O
^^
O X
K->^\
*
T
(tepdlylmdan) by
This pronoun varies as
of kicking.
I
is cast,
and the ablative preposition
indicative of the agent,
(past) act
by
another form into which this idea
which a perfect verbal noun, with a
in
kick-
is
^
my
required
:
O,
^.X-X-Xj jj (tepdlylndan) by thy act of kicking ; &c.
The
portion
gerund-like locution of verbal,
is
i.
formed of the perfect active
adverbial suffix of manner,
A&.
(je, jd),
e.,
of actional
pro-
participle, with the
added
to
It defines
it.
a duration of time for two concurrent actions, the
first
circum-
scribing that duration for the continued or repeated occurrence
0*0*
of the other;
I
as, o^lo
kick, so long as
I
^
O ^
O*
O X
AS) jJ
^
x^
kick,
(b&n tepdlkje, san tut) while
do thou hold (him).
It
sometimes
i
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
114
expresses the rate (proportion) of rapidity of the two actions
J -
o
^^"
as,
jj2kj>\
by,
it
;
oo,
oS*-
(waqt gechdlkje, iilleshlr) as time goes
AS)JJS? euSj
grows large (larger).
The
six verbal times indicated, in reference to
are the following:
when
the action
action occurs
when
4,
;
1,
the time
has occurred
it
the time before the action;
just about to occur;
is
when
6, the
;
it
3,
5,
;
time
the time just
occurrence.
its
the present verbal noun in the ablative
first is
2, the
the time while the
occurred
time after
an action,
as,
;
&H+J
The
(tep-
meden), to which, for precision's sake, the adverb J^l (avval)
5
o
or
,
j
*j,io
c3-"
O
-
(mnqaddam),
C&S
sOs
O
anteriorly, is subjoined.
Jjl cp-uJ (or Jjl e;J-J), then,
the action
of kicking
;
i.e.,
means
o,n,Q,
vulgarly expressed as J^l
^^^
expression
to (earlier
Sometimes
than)
this is
before (the agent) kicks not;
while (as yet) he has (or had) not kicked.
e.,
The second gerund-like
participle
added
to kick
to
;
The
tion
anteriorly
before kicking.
oZ*
i.
The
x^Ox
:
locution of time
is
the future active
with the auxiliary gerund C^=u1 (Iken), during,
it
thus,
;
L e
third
ij^-A
,
j^i\
<&***>
(
when just about
during (the time of being) about
to kick.
the aorist active participle with the same addi-
is
^
during (the time of being) kicking
;
i.
e.,
while
kicking.
The
fourth
is
the perfect verbal noun or active participle,
put in the locative (of time).
It
may be used
impersonally,
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
with no addition in
it
and
;
it
may be
115
used, for precision, with
the possessive pronoun of the agent between the verbal noun
and the preposition.
possibly a participle
is
verbal noun.
or
;
kicking
The
;
i.
when I
e.,
as,
;
^
it
is
doubtlessly the
when I (became) one who has
when I (performed) my
act of
(past)
kicked.
the past active participle with the auxiliary
O
^7-Xjl
in the latter,
Ox
O-
fifth is
^
;
Thus, sjJo^J
^
*jJ
^
' O
kicked
O
In the former case, the verbal derivative
O
's'
'
Cf-x_jJ ^L+j during (this time of the condition of)
having kicked ;
i.e.,
now
that kicking has occurred, since (I, &c.)
have kicked.
The
sixth
noun
the perfect verbal
is
the ablative (of
in
'
time), followed
^o,, J o ,n-Q *
by the adverb ^X-*>
after the act
*j~a jjjXx-J (tepdlkdan s6ra)
may be
possessive pronouns
1
* O
the preposition
my
as,
;
s^JLo
(s6nra, sora), after
-
of kicking.
thus,
The
introduced into this locution before
o
c>
-
O^
O,
J*^J-'V
(tepdlylmdan s6ra) after
action of kicking.
SECTION X.
In
all
The Numbers and Persons of
the tenses the
first
person singular
is
added to the verb, with eser
the personal suffix
^
tense-root,
when
this is a
ij of the tense-root where
consonant
it
occurs
;
;
the Verb.
expressed by
given to the
and suppressing the
final
adding one where wanted.
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
11G
It
is
am
wanting
kicking;
rlm)
/
kick
^jol .^..J
I
;
Thus
in the imperative.
(teplyor-ldlm)
shall or will kick
:
I was
kicking;
I would
kicked ;
I did
(tepdlm-ldl)
kick ;
/ had
I
have kicked
have kicked;
^jJ (tepdlm)
I
/ was
.jjCrj.AJ (tepejekdlm)
/ must
kick; .jjj
j\ f
I had
to
kick
/
I am going
to
+t
kick;
should have kicked,
O
(tepem)
that
I may
kick;
x Ox
;
xx
O
*-*-j
O
^^ (tepsem) if I kick
kicked;
^jj
+>+? (tepmellylm)
;
x ^
O
(tepeydlm) that
(tepejeylm)
going
ex
..JJJJ (tepdidlm) or ^jjl
(tepmelt-ldlm)
O
ought to have kicked;
;
-*&
kicked;
(tepeto
jJ^^* (teper-ldlm)
;
I would
kick;
^J
/ used
o
kick;
/
(tepiyorlm)
pjj-^
O + Cx
*J~~J
(tepseydlm) if I had kicked.
The second person
singular, in all the tenses
in
^,
is
o
formed by changing the vowel
as, djjl ]'x
dJjl
^V
e*)jjj
(t^jek-ldln), d^J
dj-~J
diii),
(tepty6r-ldln),
(tepseydln).
^
into the nasal
Turkish
ts) ;
Jlf (teper-ldln), cSjJ (tepdln),
JUJ
(tepmell-ldln), eljlj (tepey-
All the other tenses form
it
in
^^
o
(sin),
sometimes written and pronounced dL-.
the present of the conditional, which forms
it
(slii),
with dju- (ean,
o^
san)
;
sometimes written dL,, but pronounced like
(teplyirsin),
t>j-^J (tepersln),
O
excepting
0^
e*)<)
.
Thus,
jy^.JC&.AJ (tepejeksln)
;
-"x
(tepmelislu), ^jj-AJ (tepeslu).
The
first
person plural, likewise, in
all
the tenses in ^j,
is
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
formed by changing the vowel
117
into Arabic
^
d
(k value)
;
excepting that of the perfect, which, in hard words, always
O
O
forms this person in
Idlk),
^jjj
dJil^J
dj2
or
djllj
Thus, djol
1
,
(teplyir-
,j-J
djojJ (tepdldlk, or
(t^pdlk),
tepejekdlk), dj^J
JUJ
djjC.<J
or
d^aJ (t^jek-ldlk,
djol
dJC>AJ
djllf (tepeydlk),
j^G
djj
(teper-ldlk),
tepdlk-ldl),
tepejeyldlk,
O
instead of d.
j
(tepmell-ldlk),
With a hard word
(tepseydlk).
(baqmaq), the perfect forms jjjiG (bdqdiq).
like
If this per-
son in the past future indicative, in the past optative, and in
the past conditional,
with hard words, use
jj
diq), jj.J\j (baqaydiq),
and present optative,
used in the contracted form, these also,
is
instead of
JJ--^
it
is
yalim)
;
o *
leyellm),
UJ
thus,
In the imperative
formed by adding
J
having
fistun
and Js to
esere for its
vowel
;
by adding the two syllables JAJ (yellm,
(t^pellm),
^G
o
> l
^fj\
jj^ASb (baqajagh-
as,
;
(baqsaydiq).
the consonantal root, the syllable
or, in vowel-roots,
d
(b^lim),
^U^
(sAwey-
* J J
(6qAyal!m, for jJ^jl).
In hard words, the
present of the conditional forms this person with
jA-JU (baqsaq, sometimes written ,j-^C),
j
also
;
as,
jijJjl (oqAsaq,
O ^ J i
j>-yij!).
The
present, aorist,
present necessitative, form
it
and future
in
indicative, with the
j orjj, with
esere
added to
the final consonant of the tense-root of the indicatives, and
o
with that vowel given to the
(j
of y^ in
the necessitative
;
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
118
thus, jjj-J (teplyiriz),
j^j
'
x "x
Arabic
liylz).
d
(tep&rlz),
d
changed into Turkish
(tepejeylz,
y value),
JjjUJ' (tepme-
In hard words, the future indicative
before the
j), with esere
The second person
formed
in
words,
diniz).
j&_*
final
j
which
Thus,
j-Xp^-J
consonant
<j in
written alFO
(softened
^
JX^-^
and
vowel-roots
(baqdlniz),
JjljjjJ
(tepdi-
JjC.jjJJ^J (tepmell-ldlnlz),
The imperative
(tepseydlnlz).
jjCL^) j dsG
(ij
as,
;
(baqin),
^"* J >
(qaplayfn), j_x_jjjl (oquyunuz
is
(teper-
jS\ both preceded by
in
,
j_.>^J
(teplyordlnlz),
>^-p (tepdlfilz), JJCjjiG
dlnlz), J.C J^^J (tepejeydlnlz),
d
c.
hard in the perfect of hard
is
;
has two forms, in
in
plural, again, in all the tenses in
(dlfilz
(tepeydlnlz),
is
as, Jia>A$b (baqajaghiz).
;
dlnlz),
JX^
,
the
j_L*AJ
'
(tepln),
3_GG
and a
esere,
j-$
(baqin?z);
(teplnlz,
du^blJ
O
the other tenses form
in
it
the uturu dominating).
;
^_A_*.
(sliilz,
present conditional, which has ustun for
written
JjCJjlj
;
vowel, often
Thus,
better).
^" (teperslnlz), JSCJC.AJ (tepejek^S
Ox
O ^Sr
y^>
(tepeslnlz
;
*Q*
hard
is
^*
JxO>
baqajaqsiii!z), j_X*^UlJ
in
hard words,
O
t)aqasiniz),j5a-j' (tepsenlz; hard in
third person plural
O
+
hard in hard words, ^)_XJL.AS\j
(tepmellsinlz),
The
it
except the
(teplyArsiniz), J-5
O
slnlz
its first
(sanlz, saniz, to distinguish
J_A
sinlz),
All
^*
^LdsG
O +
hard words, jjA^G
baqsaiifz).
formed from the same person of
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
the singular, with the syllable
(tepsinler);
ytf$
j^J
The
(jA becoming
"O J +
added.
may
Thus,
JljJ
(teperler),
(tepmeliler),
tenses in ^jjl
JJ *J
(tepdller),
>~J
(tepeler),
be formed in this way,
the plural sign
may
be given
element, and ^jjj be kept unchanged
Ox
;
as,
J *
O
O* Jti*$
\S*vjsf
optative,
(ler, lar)
j!J
Jbjol (Idller) ; or,
the radical
*
jjj
(tepejekler),
(tepseler).
to
(teply6rlar),
J
119
j)s?
I
an ^ so throughout, except the past
which prefers ^Lj.
SECTION
The Complex
XL Of
the
Complex Categories.
Categories of every Turkish verb, active or
passive, transitive or intransitive, affirmative, negative, or im-
even as to their
potential, are formed,
O ' O
roots,
with an auxiliary
>
verb, j^Jjl (61maq)
to
be or become;
itself
conjugated, as a
simple verb, in conformity with what has already been laid
down, and joined
to the aorist, past,
and future active par-
ticiples of the verb of which the complex category
formed.
The
O
*
j
\
O >
the First Complex Category; with the past participle,
it
to be
auxiliary follows the participle.
"With the aorist participle, the auxiliary verb
the Second
is
Complex Category; and with the future
forms
\J
it
forms
participle,
forms the Third Complex Category.
It
would be possible
to avoid using these terms,
and
to fuse
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
120
the whole into one vast conjugation, by following the method
used by European grammarians, each for the European lan-
guage
in
which he
In some respects,
treats of the subject.
such an arrangement would possess an advantage.
It
would
bring together tenses of the one verb, which are but delicate
The disadvantage would
modifications of each other.
the whole, preponderant
;
be,
on
for the one vast conjugation of
simple and complex tenses formed with continually
inter-
mingling, varying participles, would be very puzzling to the
novice, would choke out of view the principles of the sub-
and
division,
prevent a
lucid
exposition
thereof,
besides
demanding the invention of a host of new names by which
to
distinguish
the numerous
tenses
so
brought
together
;
whereas, by keeping the same names for the same tenses of
the four categories,
it
would seem that a truer perception
of the shade of meaning which distinguishes each of the four
tenses of each
firmly grasped.
offers a certain
name
will
Still,
be more easily attained and more
as a comparison with other systems
amount of
utility,
three complex categories apart, to
we have
show
given below the
their principles,
and
have then arranged the whole four categories as a single conjugation.
SECTION XII.
This
is
The First Complex Category.
formed with the aorist active
participle, of
every
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
121
of verb, active or passive, transitive or intransitive,
class
In form,
primary or derivative, affirmative or negative.
it
is
simply the conjugation of the auxiliary verb Jjj! (61maq)
to
be,
an adjective, remaining invariable
the participle, as
throughout.
We give
one person only in each tense.
Infinitive.
J
To be a
(teper olmaq)
willing, natural, deter-
mined, constant, or habitual
kicker ; to be kicking
kick (habitually).
to
;
Imperative.
Be thou
(teper 61)
kicking
;
kick thou
(habitually).
Indicative.
Present,
(teper 6lly6rim)
am
I
continually kicking.
Imperfect,
O
n
J
J
rs
(teper 6Hy6r Idlm) I
was continually kicking.
Aorist.
y J?
(teper olurum)
I
am
continually kicking
;
I
shall be ever kicking.
Past.
6lur Idlm)
fo\jj (teper
I used to be always kicking;
I
would
be, or
would have
been, always kicking.
122
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Perfect.
O J o J OXx
I became a constant kicker.
^jjjl^ (teper oldum)
Pluperfect.
jjl
jjJjl^J (teper
oldAm
Idl)
I had been or become a constant kicker.
Future.
j*ia.A)jl^J
(teper olajaghlm)
I
am
about to become a con-
stant kicker.
Future Past.
O
Ox
ob..
x
.
O "v
Jjl^J (teper 61ajaghdim) I was about to become a constant kicker.
Necessitative.
Aorist.
fj (teper
6lmaliyim)
I
must
be, or
become, a con-
stant kicker.
Past.
^
(teper 6lmaliyldlm) I ought to
have been a con-
stant kicker.
Optative.
Aorist.
^jjjl^ (teper olaylm)
That I may be a constant
kicker.
Past.
-jJjl^J (teper olaydlm)
That
I
had been a constant
kicker.
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
123
Conditional.
Aorist.
Were
(teper 6lsam)
should I become, a
I,
constant kicker.
Past.
jLjjI^J (teper 61saydlm)
Had
I been a constant kicker.
Active Participles.
Present.
\j+>
(teper 6lan)
Who
or
which
is,
was, will be,
a constant kicker.
Aorist.
I
Ji
(teper 6lAr)
(perhaps unused, as a cacophony.)
Past.
jijjl^J (teper olmush)
Who
has
been
a
constant
kicker.
Perfect.
>J (teper oldiiq)
Who
was a constant
kicker.
Future.
ja-AJy
J
(teper ilajaq)
Who is to be a constant kicker.
Passive Participles.
Aorist.
(teper 61duq)
Who
or
which
(a kicker) has
constantly kicked.
124
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Future.
Who, which
(teper 61ajaq)
(I,
&c.)
am
about
constantly to kick.
Verbal Nouns.
Present.
aJjl^
The
act of being (at any time)
a constant kicker.
(teper olma)
Perfect.
The
act of having been (then)
a constant kicker.
jjJjI^J (teper 61duq)
Future.
&ffyjf
The
(teper olajaq)
act of being about (now)
to
become
(hereafter) a con-
stant kicker.
\
Gerunds.
O
1st.
J J O"
-
s-i^jW (teper
Being a constant kicker
61iip)
(and
2nd.
).
Continuing to be a con-
J>jdj\jj (teper olaraq)
stant kicker (so
and
so
also occurs).
3rd.
&)\ Jll
(teper olunjd)
As soon
>
4th.
,l^j^
(teper olijaq)
as
becomes
/
J
(became, will become) a
constant kicker,
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
5th.
Jjl
Jjl^J (teper 61a 61a)
By
125
continually being a con-
stant kicker,
6th.
^OjjI^J
(teper olmaghin)
By
reason of being a con-
stant kicker,
7th.
J J,ljj
(teper olall)
Ever
became
since
been)
(has
a constant
kicker,
SECTION XIII.
The Second Complex Category.
Infinitive.
Present.
Jj/l JLli' (tepmlsh 61maq)
To have
kicked.
Imperative.
Future.
*J'
Be thou one who has
(tepmlsh 61)
kicked
;
have kicked.
Indicative.
Present.
*-j
am becoming, one
who has kicked; I have
I am, or
(tepmlsh 6lly6rim)
kicked.
Imperfect.
,ji*->
(tepmlsh 6lly6rdim)
I was, or
one
who
was becoming,
has kicked.
Aorist.
i*J (tepmlsh 6liirum)
I shall have kicked.
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
126
Past
JU-J
(tepmlsh olurdum)
I should
have kicked.
Perfect.
JU*>
(tepmlsh 61dum)
I
became one who
kicked, I
had
had kicked.
Pluperfect.
5
(tepmlsh oldum
idl)
I had
become one who has
kicked.
Future.
(tepmlsh olajaghim)
I
am about becoming one
who has kicked I am
;
going to have kicked.
Future Past.
- t
O
O*
was
about
to
have
kicked.
Necessitative.
Aorist.
Ij2j1 ,jLj (tepmlsh 61mallyim)
I must (now) have kicked
(then).
Past.
(tepmlsh 6lmaliyldlm) Imust (then) have (already)
kicked (before).
Optative.
Aorist.
f J
!*!/
O
O'
JW (t&prolsh
r *Jjl
^lay^im,
61am)
That I may have
kicked.
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
127
Past.
0, i
O
OX
O
l*J (tepmlsh 61aydlm)
That
I
Had
I kicked (then).
had kicked.
Aorist.
l^Jjl ,jiJ (tepmlsh 61sam, pJjl)
Past.
v
r
j.1 JL*J (tepmlsh olsaydlm)
Had
I
V
x
(already) kicked
**
(before then).
.4cfoV0 Participles.
Present.
"
(tepmlsh 6 Ian)
Who
has (already) kicked.
Aorist.
LJ
(tepmlsh 61ur)
Who
have (already)
will
kicked.
Past and Perfect, perhaps not used.
Future.
*J (tepmlsh
olajaq)
Who
will
become one who
has kicked.
Passive Participles.
Aorist.
OJO
J
O
O
iUJ (tepmlsh 61diiq)
Which
(a
kicker)
(already)
kicked.
had
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
128
Future.
Ox
O
x J
Ox
UJ
(tepmlsh 61ajaq)
Which
(a kicker) will
hare
kicked.
Verbal Nouns.
Present.
lJ
(tepmlsh. olma)
The
state
(present
of)
having (already) kicked.
Perfect,
(tepmlsh oldAq)
The
(past state of) having
(previously) kicked.
Future.
(^Pmisl1 ^^j^q)
The
state
(future
having
of)
(previously)
kicked.
Gerunds.
1st.
2nd.
t-jJjl
jyJjl
<j^
...
(t^pnrish 61up)
(
...
oldraq)
Having kicked
Having
the
kicked (and
t
A^l
continued
of
quality
3rd.
(and....).
...
(
...
oliinja)
As soon
as
(
will be) one
having
...).
is,
was,
who
which had kicked,
4th.
jij/l
...
(
...
6Hjaq)
The
instant
kicked,
(
....
)
or
.
.
.
had
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
5th.
*Jjl
jy
jj^
(tepmlsh old 61a)
129
continuing to have
By
kicked,
6th. c^iJj'
...
(
...
olmaghin)
....
reason
By
kicked,
7th.
^j-Mjl
...
(
...
61all)
of
became
Since
who had
SECTION XIV.
having
....
kicked,
one
....
The Third Complex Category.
Infinitive.
Present.
(tepejek olmaq)
To
be about to kick
(ready to kick).
Imperative.
Future.
*j (tepejek 61)
Be thou about
to kick.
Indicative.
Present.
O
1
J
Q
J
(tepejek 6lly6rim)
I
am (often) on
of kicking
;
the point
I become
on the point
....
Imperfect.
y or Idlm)
I was (often) on the
point
....
Aorist.
jl
<s^^
(tepejek 6lAnim)
I
am
shall
(habitually),
be
the point
(then)
...
I
on
\
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
130
Past.
I used (habitually)
I
should be (then) on
(tepejek 61urdum)
;
'
the point
....
Perfect.
I
(tepejek 61dum)
was (then) on the
point
....
Pluperfect.
(tepejek oldum
I
Idl)
had
been
(before
then) on the point....
Future and Future Past.
liLj/l tsU^" (tepejek olajaghim) }
I
Not
used, as being caco-
jek oldjaghdim))
Necessitative.
Aorist.
ci>.A*)
(tepejek 61malij!m)
I
must
point
be
on
the
....
Past.
o ^
xx
iitAv (tepejek 61mdliyldlm)
I ought to have been
on the point
....
Optative.
Aorist.
O +
+*
A*J
(tepejek olam)
That I may be on the
point
....
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
131
Past.
That
jek 6 lay dim)
I
point
had been on the
....
Conditional.
Aorist.
,0
-Jjl
o f
r+
(skxJuJ
Were
(tepejek olsam)
I to be or become om
the point
....
Past.
Jjl ctkj-A^
Had
(tepejek 61saydim)
I been on the point
....
Active Participles.
Present.
jVjl ciU<V
Who
(tepejek 61an)
or which
on the point
is
or becomes
....
Aorist.
Who
(tepejek 6lAr)
or which
is
(naturally)
or will be (some time) on
the point ....
Past and Perfect.
(tepejek 61mush)' )
I
Who
,,
or which has been or
Future.
;
Jjl
ttL *^ (tipejek 6lajaq)
Not used, as
being cacophonous.
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
132
Passive Participles.
Aorist.
jy
12-UdI?
(tepejek oldAq)
Which
(a kicker)
point
was on the
....
Future.
Cacophonous
not used.
;
Verbal Nouns.
Present.
Jjl
The
sLLaJ (t^P^k olma)
act of being or becoming
(at
any time) on the point ....
Perfect.
(tepejek Alduq)
The
past act or state of being
(then) on the point
....
Future.
Cacophonous ; not used.
Gerunds.
1st.
tljjji
<*U*J (tepejek 6lAp)
Being
(and
2nd.
3rd.
(jjd^
A_sjl
...
...
(
(
...
olaraq)
...
oliinja)
about
kick
to
....)
Continuing to be about
to kick (and ....)
As
soon as
(
is,
was,
will be) about to kick,
4th.
^^1
...
Cacophonous.
ACCIDENCE OK ETYMOLOGY.
(tepejek 614
5th.
By
Md)
133
to
continuing
about to kick,
6th.
*
olmaghin)
(
By
reason
about
7th.
..
Ever
olall)
(
of
being
....
became
since
on the point
SECTION XV.
be
....
....
The Combined (true Turkish) Conjugation.
Infinitive.
Present.
J"
Imperative.
J
Future.
O
IJ
Indicative.
Present.
Imperf.
Aorist.
Past.
Perfect
Pluperf.
Future.
<ak**J
j.*)jl
...
vjfc-^jl
...
(not used)
(not used)
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
134
Necessitative.
V
Aorist.
PaSt.
(Jjjl
Aorist.
J
1
;>
f
Jjl^J
A_J^1
)-
,
*J
j
Conditional.
Aorist.
Past.
Active Participles.
Present.
Aorist.
Past.
(^U)^"
^-*>
used)
Perfect.
Future.
used)
Passive farticiples.
Aorist.
Future.
(not used)
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
135
Verbal Nouns.
Present.
Perfect.
jj,i...
Future.
(woi used.)
4,1...
. .
.Gerunds.
il
X
'x
1st
2nd.
3rd.
4th.
J
5th.
XO J
6th.
7th.
SECTION
XVL
TAe Negative and Impotential Conjugations.
The Negative and
number
cisely
Impotential Conjugations, twenty-four in
to each simple verb, as a general rule, are
on the
lines
formed pre-
of the simple affirmative conjugation in
its
four categories, as above given, with the exception of the
aorist of the indicative, as to its
root-word of the third person
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
136
singular,
and the corresponding
aorist active participle,
OX
end
which
O
j* (maz), instead of the final^ of the affirmative.
in
Infinitive.
Present.
Imperative.
Future.
Present.
N.
O J Ox
O
x-
i Oxox
O J
J
O
/Ox
Imperfect.
Aorist.
oJJO-0'
O J
J
Ox
xxO..
ACCIDENCE OB ETYMOLOGY.
137
Past.
JO J J
Of
xxOx
jo J
of
f ,r.f
Perfect.
Je J
ox-ox
Jo J
xO-
o
UM-M.'
>v
Pluperfect.
Future.
j>. Jjl
uloUJ
o
*
(no
ws^c?)
**
(not used)
Future Past.
J
O
xO,
(not used)
(not used)
Necessitative.
Aorist.
J
jL.U?
V v
Ox XXOX
138
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Past.
<j.>j
Optative.
Aorist.
-
J Oxn.
Past.
Ox ,-Ox
O- J
Conditional.
Aorist.
O
Active Participles.
Present
O x J CxOx
O
x t
O
X
XX
X*
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
139
Aorist.
Past.
used)
"Perfect.
X
J
OJ-)
O
-f
Future.
wsec?)
Passive Participles.
Aorist.
Future.
o -
-
i
o
-o.
(not used}
140
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
Verbal Nouns.
Present.
Perfect.
o if
oxo x
o Jn J
o
Future.
O x
<xOx
O
X J
ox * *
(not used)
(not used)
1st.
2nd.
3rd.
dl
4th.
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
141
6th.
7th.
SECTION XVII.
TAe Dubitative, Potential and Facile Verbs, &c.
The Dubitative Verb
(mlsh, mish), or the
is
word
formed by adding the syllable
to
<jl*jj (Imlsh),
any
JL
personal verb,
indicative or necessitative, active or passive, affirmative, negative, or
im potential
the syllable
said
;
and
^
is
;
but, in the perfect indicative,
(dl) of the root.
It casts a doubt
often added, in conversation,
to express that he considers
it
displaces
on what
is
by another speaker,
what has been affirmed by the
former speaker to be questionable, or hearsay, or mere assumption.
When
the
first
speaker uses
express that what he relates
is
it
himself, he does so to
either doubtful, hearsay, or
erroneous assumption, from some other person.
vulgarism, to
It
is
a gross
which Armenians and European novices are
addicted, to use this dubitative syllable, in conversation,
where
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
142
the <j* of the perfect indicative, or of any compound tense,
is
In writing, there
required.
no denying that
is
form
this
is
systematically used, by the host authorities, in place of the
The form has
tense they would employ in speaking.
musical sound
and
;
it
Persian verb -forms
in
is,
in
my
a more
opinion, a fruit of imitating
Turkish;
initiated,
by the
probably,
Persian scribes of the early reigns.
In dubitative conjugation,
simple tense-root and
this
its plural,
syllable
preceding the compound and
personal terminations, singular or plural
by another person.
In this
Thus
:
o
^jl^-j-J (teplyormlsh
kicking;
(jt+*\j*>
Idlii)
(teper Imlsh)
(tepermlsh Idlk)
<o
have kicked
(tepmlsh slnlz)
;
it is
it
is
J
comes alone,
-
it
it
is
is
that
&c.,
Potential
Verb
kicking;
that thou waft
said,
fyc.,
that he kicks;
fyc.,
we used
to
formed of the
kick
it is
fifth
said,
,
fyc.,
J^
(
its
to
be able,
,
is
re-
entire con-
This
jugation, the gerund remaining unchanged throughout.
then means
that
.)
gerund (not
peated) followed by the verb dijb (bllmek) in
auxiliary verb
;
that you kicked or
(This word or syllable, Jt+A
is
is
fyc.,
said, $c., that
said,
I am
really the past active participle of the obsolete verb diil
The
it
said,
^+>\ JOZ-*-*** (tepejekler imlsh)
they are going to kick.
be spoken
it
-1^,^-J (teplyormlshlm)
said, supposed, pretended, suggested,
eJjjJ
unless
;
last case, it naturally
o
after all other words.
the
follows
,jl
and answers
to
our
ACCIDENCE OR ETTMOI
Ex.: <sU*
English can.
.,
.jib
*J (tepe billy orim)
The
Facile
an esere
Verb
(tepe bllmek) to be able to kick;
t~>
/ am
able to kick,
in
^
a consonantal
,
^
the root-vowel and the servile
vowel
(j
this
,
vowel
servile
*
made
is
^5
^
added between
is
and with a verb in
;
as, isL^j---)
;
which
to
into a consonant with esere,
then added
is
vowel
&c.
a vowel verb other
with e*ere,
,
and the
(tepl-vlrmek),
O^O-'jJ
*
"
;
and the auxiliary
^
With
verb d^i^ (vlrmek, vulg. vermek).
than one
kick
formed by the root of a verb,
is
added, followed by a vowel
is
I can
(qaplayi- vlrmek),
ftU^j^ijI
The
(qaziyi- vlrmek).
(oqAy u- vlrmek),
sense of these verbs
is
that
we
of great ease, readiness, off-handedness in the action, which
express in English by saying just
cover over
just
to
out
&c.
;
just
;
to
to kick,
Just
to give
read or recite ; just
There are several other Turkish verbs
to
a kick
scratch
in use as special
o
auxiliaries after the
gerund of the original verb
O-O^
QsC
O>O<*
;
;
^
o^,
dlji
as,
*>
J^j^ (dormaq), jjli (qalmdq), j^Jlj (yatmaq), and
^j^Q (yazmdq). The first expresses a frequent or natural
(galmek),
happening
;
the next three signify persistency
;
and the
last
the idea of having almost happened, of being within an ace
of happening.
Thus, c*UK
quently, of course, as
L_>jC (baqiip
is
well
*Jjl
(614
known;
durmaq)
to
galmek)
to be
to
happen fre-
a common occurrence ;
stand looking ;
j Jl
A$G
(baqa
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
144
qalmaq)
stand (remain) staring in surprise and amazement;
to
-Ljlj (_j^ijj
remain
to
(dushuuup yatmaq)
(lie)
pondering, in
1
a brown study;
j^G
A>\i
(bayil&
to give one s self up
yazmaq)
&c.
(write) as about to faint; &c., &c.,
SECTION XVIII.
In Turkish there
in all its
is
The Verb Substantive.
no extant verb substantive, answering
moods and tenses
the Turkish j^Jjl performs the
independent verb
;
In one sense,
to our verb to be.
as an auxiliary
office,
but as such,
and as an
a verb adjective, and con-
it is
tinually lapses into the parallel idea of to become.
The Turkish
(Imek)
originally
had a true verb substantive,
This exists fragmentary
to be.
etU^l
Ottoman Turkish;
in
perhaps in certain persons of the present, certainly in the perfect of the indicative, in the aorist conditional, in the past
active participle, in the perfect verbal noun, and in the gerund,
apparently modified from the present active participle (which in
eastern and old Turkish was and
Js
,
is
traces of which are numerous
formed
in
jifor
^U
,
even
in Ottoman, as adjectives).
Thus:
Indicative.
Present.
*>\
thou art
slfilz)
(1m, 1m),
;
you
^_>1
are.
^
(Iz, Iz),
(ylm, yim)
y_
(ylz,
/ am
;
^
(
ylz) we are
;
(sin,
JjC
sin)
(slniz,
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
Perfect.
he was
/
(idiin)
^>\
d Jjl
;
jjl (tdiler)
was, eljj (Idln) thou
(Idlk)
we were
;
>5o
jjl
145
ivast,
^jjl (Idl)
(idlnlz)
you were ;
they were.
Conditional Aorist.
+t~j\ (It-am) if I
o*)A-j1
(Isek)
(l.eler)
e)^
am,
(/*
we
(Isan) if thou art, A~\ (Ise) if he
are,
/ you
jS*~>\ (Isanlz)
are,
is
;
j*~$
z/ they are.
Past Active Participle.
(iinlsh)
Verbal
who or which was.
Noun
(Idlk) the fact
Perfect.
of having
been.
Gerund.
O ^X"
O
JXjl (Iken,
"
oW ^.1
Ikdn) c/urm^ the fact of being.
These fragments are made negative by prefixing the adverb
p
dlyll) not.
(dlytl idlm)
o
o
7 was
Thus,
no<
;
JXp
(dlylllm)
/ am
wo^,
liljl j5sli (dlyll Isem)
?/
^J
/ am
jC,A
not
;
.^
djj! JXjj (dlyll Idlk) not used as a verbal noun, but replaced
O
xO J
O'O
by j^ljjl (61madiq) the negative verbal noun perfect of Jj^l
^!
(dlyll Iken) wfo'te no<
j^o
The present
verb
is
;
iem^.
tense indicative of the foregoing fragmentary
completed, as to
its
third persons, singular and plural,
L
;
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
146
by using, when necessary
distinctive
dir)
is,
and
dirlar) are
its
particle of affirmation,
is
(dlr,
just as well expressed by the singular).
o
still
..>
conventional (unnecessary) plural,
J^> (dlrler,
(which
This word
and most
only, the special, unique,
Turkish invariable
..>
pronounced
o J
,
written in eastern Turkish
in provincial
Ottoman,
is
^
(dur), as
it
'
o
old
and eastern writings, under the uncontracted form of jjjj*
(durur).
is,
to
This circumstance leads
to a suspicion that the
originally, the aorist of the ordinary
word
verb J^j-i (durmaq)
remain.
However that may
is
is
often found also, in
be, the peculiarity of the
word
is
that
it
not special to the third person singular, or to the two third
persons, singular and plural.
It
is
often used, in writing and
in conversation, after a verb of the first or second person also,
singular or plural, of any simple tense of the indicative, with
or without the plural signal,
in fact,
c'est
when
the sense admits
It
it.
is,
an exact equivalent to the French inchoative expression
que,
and the Latin constat quod, which can be used
introduce any indicative proposition, as the Turkish
to conclude
and complete any such.
And,
as the
^
is
to
used
French and
Latin clauses can be omitted without the sense suffering, so
also can the
Turkish
^
.
In conversation
it
is
much more
dispensed with than used.
The
negative of j*
is
^ jC^
(dljll dlr) is not
;
pi.
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
and
(dlyiller dlr)
SECTION XIX.
(dlyll dlrler) are not
J^ jC>
expressed without the
147
(just as well
]).
The Verb of Presence and Absence, of Existence
and Non-Existence.
THERE ARE NO SUCH VERBS
What
IN TURKISH.
and what Europeans have erroneously chosen
there are,
to designate as
o
o *
two
such, are
may
(y6q)
Like any other substantive or adjective,
absent or non-existent.
these
J
adjectives, j\j (var) present or existent, jjj
be followed by the verbal particle of affirmation
any other case,
which, in this case, as in
may
^,
be omitted in
conversation.
It
convenient, occasionally, for a novice in Turkish
may be
OxoOx
to suppose that
or
jij
means
there
is not.
.3
or
it,
non-existent)
existent
is
The
Jj
;
*
that j;^ or
expressions really say and
present (or existent}
as,
;
there is
oj
i->
o
J
Jiji-
But, unless rightly understood, those ren-
derings are misleading.
he, she,
o
means
\j
^\
;
he, she,
or
it, is
mean
absent (or
(atesh var) fire (is) present (here), or
(somewhere) ; jjj ^"1 (atesh y6q)
fire (is) absent (here),
or non-existent (anywhere).
Then, such a phrase as
o
existent), J^l
becomes
exist,
o
,
(var 61) be thou present (or
be thou absent (or non-existent),
j^_i (y6q 61)
clear.
and
J^l Jj
J
The
first is
a kind of prayer, Mayest thou ever
be at hand, ready to help the afflicted
!
while the
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
148
second
annihilation,
Avaunt
wish
a
or
my
pocket)
;
^jjl
jjjj
J
o->
my
* o
*
j\j 5>G *>*._-
(jeblmdd pdra var)
money
in
my
*
J-i)l
JjLjl
my firewood was
firewood in
:
present (I have some
is
pocket money
o J
By
Away I
&c.
!
special instead of general
house
the nature of a curse,
in
or
using a locative with these two expressions, they become
By
m
banishment
condemnation, a sentence of
a
is
absent,
(evlmde odunum yoq
Idl) in
house).
using a possessive pronoun (with or without a genitive
as well) with these
two expressions, the idea of possession
superadded
;
^G
exists
/
(i. e.,
as, j\j
have money,
yoq) money belonging
money);
dir)
my
wanting, non-existent (I had no
to thee (is)
^ ^ ^^Lillj
many
(param var) money belonging
I have some money}
non-existent
jj*.
eL-Gu
books belonging
to his
many
books)
;
^jjl
jjj; is)i^
(i. e.,
(babl-iniii
chAq
O
s
*
Q
is
me
(parafi
thou hast no
kitahlari var
father are existent
OJO
^_ .^L^i
"
father has
;
to
(i. e.,
his
<*
KL ~j (benlm sana
thtlyajlm y6q Idl) any need of mine to (lean on) thee (for assist-
ance) was non-existent
SECTION
(i. e.,
XX.
/ had no need of thee).
Of
the
Compound
Verbs.
Besides the Turkish verbs already described, the Ottoman
language has been indefinitely enriched with whole classes of
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
compound
and
verbs, active
passive, transitive
149
and
intransitive,
formed by a Turkish auxiliary verb preceded by a substantive
or adjective of Arabic or Persian, even of foreign, origin.
An
active
compound verb
formed, generally, by an Arabic,
is
by a Persian verbal noun, or by a foreign substantive,
rarely
o
-
followed by one of the auxiliaries ti t
f)
*
(itmek, vulg. etmek),
*}
O* O
* Q*
eUJLjl (eylemek),
to
o
"
command,
to
O
jJLS (qllmaq)
to
deign
do
;
or
or
to do,
>
O
> J
J^j-j (biiyurmaq)
by an Arabic (very seldom, a
Persian, never a foreign) active participle, followed by the
tive or intransitive.
in sense
;
the
first
These verbs are either
to be.
auxiliary j>Jjt (61maq)
The
first
three auxiliaries are identical
the most frequently used
is
often, the third occasionally, replaces
tion
;
and the fourth
is
it,
;
the second
so as to avoid repeti-
used when a deferential tone
is
0-00*0
(irsal
c
Thus, d^oj JL^l
buyurmaq)
to
(Irsal
dCLl
;
^y
O^rs J
a home)
;
o +
visit, to
(tevattiin
eylemek)
o
pay a
to or
*0 JJ c
s O
j^-i JU,1
to
favour by
J
v^>
(mujlb 6lmaq)
to settle (in
a place, as
+
jjjl ^U-ij (peshlman olmaq)
penitently sorry (for
send ;
deign or condescend to send,
sending, to have the goodness to send; j>Jjl
to cause
to
etmek)
0,0 t
assumed
and politely
in speaking or writing to or of a superior,
of an equal.
transi-
some
act)
;
to be regretfully
dU^I *^j>.)
(vlzlte
etmek)
or
to
visit.
Transitive verbs of this class form their passives with the
auxiliary
<jJy (Alunmaq), which, by
itself,
does not admit of
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
150
translation.
Thus,
have done (to
it) the
JU,1
l
(Irsal
to be sent, to
olunmaq)
action of being sent
and
(for the Arabic
Persian verbal nouns, the reverse of the more general Turkish
rule, take the passive as well as the active sense).
compound
Deferential
passives are formed with the passive auxiliary
(buyurulmdq)
;
jJ^J
as,
descendingly sent,
to
jC,!
(Irsfil
Jj^o
to be con-
buyurulindq)
be kindly sent.
Reciprocal verbs active of this class are formed with the
reciprocal of
mek)
that
,
isL^jjl
as,
;
i*Xio1
is,
with the auxiliary
diio>>! (Idlsh-
(khusumet Idlshmek) mutually
tz**j-ai.
to
exercise hostility, litigation, or spite, towards one another.
Causatives of the simple and reciprocal are formed by the
r +o o
e-oo
0,0
0*0
causatives of c*LoJ and &U*Jti, namely,
d^jql (sL^j^jj
,
OiL,jij1 Jt-^,1
to
cause or
to cause
let
or
let
(a thing) be sent; (aL^j^jjl
(two or more) mutually attack each
Negatives and
1
;
thus,
o^^i.
other.
iinpotentials, as also dubitatives, potentials,
o^o
and
faciles,
are constructed with those forms of
r
other auxiliaries.
not
to
0,0
, 'O
Thus, e*LLo\
jC,!
to be
able
to
send
;
o ' '
JL-.I not to
be able to send ;
,ji-oj JL^I
jl
isLcjl
it
9U^#Jg)
is
send
;
and the
-
O
* O
(*LL*5jjl JLj,)
said that he sent;
JU^
just
to send.
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
SECTION XXI.
the Interrogative
Of
Verb,
151
and Interrogation
in general.
All interrogations, in Turkish (when an interrogative pro-
noun
is
not present in the phrase, as such), are
ducing the interrogative particle or adverb
made by
^
intro-
(ml, mi) into
proper position in the phrase.
its
The proper
position of this particle in the phrase
We
of the word on which the question turns.
valent for
enclitic
it
in
particle
English
ne,
are
;
its
in Latin the
word
equivalents;
also
is
the end
have no equian,
the
and the
French
est-ce que ?
This
may be
each of which
best
may
shown by an example of
turns, so that the adverb
them
1.
Is
2.
^
successively joined to each of
is
Thus
to indicate that speciality.
^^-JCa-A-^j AIU^C
it
thou
five elements,
be the word on which the question specially
who art
4^
9-C ^5*
to ride with
j.^X_a.jjj <UA^C 4*?
me
<5?"W u-*
:
(sanml sabah benlmld
'ara-
bay blnejeksln)
to-morrow in the carriage"
(s^
n sabahml bentmld
'ara-
bayd benejeksln)
to-morrow that thou art to ride with
Is
it
3.
c>rJv_a.A^
Is
it
*JA>jC
^4-^
-
eJ-*'
(s^n
me
in the carriage ?
sabah benlmlami
bay
'ara-
blnejeksln)
with me that thou art to ride in the carriage to-morrow
?
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
152
.
4..~S^*
^c *U)
JLo
^
(san sabah
mi
Is
it
5.
c
in the carriage that
^
rr
x_a.A^ U.HJS. 4U?
blnej^ksln)
thou art to ride with
-W
me
to-morrow
?
sabah benlmla 'arabaya
^r* (san
blnejekmlsln)
Art thou going
This does
to ride
with
me to-morrow
however, exhaust the possible points of the
not,
question in the case of this sentence,
the adverb
^
in the carriage ?
in
it.
The phrase
nor the proper places of
itself
may be
in question, as
whether these words were used, or some others, by the
to
person to
whom
the adverb
verb
;
^
^
the interrogation
would stand
^JC.4Jj
v_ujt 4^0
addressed.
In that case,
after the personal
ending of the
is
^
1C1
e
(san sdbah benlmla ara-
baya binejeksln ml), which means, Dost thou
say, thou wilt ride
with me to-morrow in the carriage ?
The
last
two instances
call specially for the
0x0
f
,
el.5
>\
^ JL^l Is
it
Ox*x
to
may be
ask,
to send (and not himself carry, for instance)
that he is going to do ?
Is he going
^
Thus we may
between the two elements of the verb.
O
explanation that,
compound verbs the proper place of the adverb
in
and
x
^ x_jjl
O
'
O
JL^I
(Irsal Idejekml)
send ?
In Turkish simple or derivative verbs, supposing that the
adverb
is
to follow the verb in the sentence,
and not some
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
other
in
member
thereof, then a further question is seen to arise
to the exact part of the verb itself
No. 5 above given, as
that takes this
first
word
it.
In this respect, the tenses have
The
simple tenses take the adverb at
after
be considered.
to
153
the end of the tense-root, and their compounds
also, before
O J
O J
their auxiliary ^jjl
was
;
thus, ^jjl^d
w
he doing?
&>*
^jjl
Next, a distinction has to be made between
he doing ?
the third persons, singular and plural, as one group, and the
first
and second persons, singular and plural
The
group.
also, as
another
first-named group of tenses have no personal
endings, the second group have special personal endings, and
the interrogative precedes these, following the tense-root
thus, jlrvjlj (teplyirmlylm)
misln) art thou kicking ?
O
O J
am I
kicking ?
O
j-^jj-J (teplyormiylz) are we kicking ?
are you
kicking?
.^^j^
^^^
S*
;
(teplyor-
he kicking ?
is
^jj*-? (teplyorml)
+
mlalnlz)
{
still
*
J
jS^^^jj^
(teplyir-
(teply6rlerml) are
they
kicking ?
The
perfect tense indicative forms an exception to the fore-
going rule, as
endings.
it
Thus,
takes the interrogative after the personal
^*^ (tepdlmml) have I kicked ?
did
I
hast thou kicked? didst thou kick?
LrJoJ (tepdlnml)
(tepdlml) has he kicked?
have we kicked
?
did we kick ?
kicked ? did you kick ?
did they kick ?
did he kick?
j^J^jJ
^JluJ
^
<
kick ?
^JJ
} (tepdlkml)
(tepdlfilzml) have
you
(tepdllerml) have they kicked ?
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAK.
154
SECTION XXII.
As
Of
explained in Section
II.,
Adverbial Expressions.
every Turkish adjective
is
also
au adverb.
Every noun of time
(sabah gdl) come to-morrow
early
jJ&,LLU (akhsham
;
;
climb up, ascend
jo^jTj^Ll
\sj&y.
J ^U.1
;
(llerl git)
as,
;
J -\~*
(jjft (j= j\ (erken galdl) he came
a
gellr) he will
Adjectives of relative place, like
adverbs; thus, j^a.
an adverb
also used as
is
come in
the evening.
all adjectives,
are used as
(yAqarl chiq) mount up, walk up,
(ashighl gal) come down, descend
go forward, advance;
j^-jT(gerl
;
gal)
come back.
But
substantives of place, like
adverbially by the sole
O
J
J >
thus, j^j^jl
o> J -
o
,
,
substantives, can be used
all
means of being joined
to prepositions
he
JJj'jl (vuqarida 6tuiiy6r)
is sitting
higher up;
"
x
/ am coming jrom below
(Vl* cjJ^U.1 (ashaghldan gellyorim)
o-^AcU
A
(sagha git) go
o
expression
An
;
as,
&c.
s* O 3
a^,.l
(jji-s.
~*
>
^
(ustuma chiqdi) he mounted on
to
of me.
adjective, substantive,
an adverbial expression
side,
to the right ;
;
pronoun may enter into such an adverbial
possessive
the top
;
J
lower down;
from lower down.
^J^
;
as,
oJl
and preposition may join
aj^L Jjl
(^lt
(alt tarafda)
tardfdan)
from
on
to
form
the lower
the lower side
;
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
So an
155
and preposition may
adjective, substantive, possessive,
+
be combined in an adverbial expression
the side above
to
yaulma)
side below thee
^J^L cL
;
o o
*
J
a^U e>-yl
as,
;
(fist
iCiG eJI (alt yaninda) on the
me;
(sagh tarafindan) from his
(her, its}
riylit-liand side.
With
any Arabic substantive or
certain special exceptions,
adjective becomes an adverb by adding an ustun and vowel
to
it
this being often
;
read dn
an
the word
or, if
is
a feminine in
s
,
;
thus, i^Jo
(tuldn)
in
length,
sign,
longwise,
in
without
it,
longitude
Of
#
U^_c ('arzan) in breadth, breadthwise, in latitude;
ue bahran) by land and by sea;
(lierr&n
formerly;
mu4khkh4ran)
V^j*
(qdt'an ve qatibetan) decidedly
The
bially; as, JJl
thirdly;
UK
S
(rabfa) fourthly
(sadlsa) sixthly
;
*
;
\^ij\^>
iJo\5
j
(xWa
entirely.
much used
(vv&\&) firstly; Li^ (sfmlya) secondly;
s
(tasl'a)
recently;
ten Arabic ordinals are thus
first
;
S ,
Uji* (muqaddema)
latterly,
and
and
by putting two
with or without the double ustun sign to
dots,
I
;
marked with a double ustun
\
Ol (khamlsa)
'
#
l*JG
adver(sallsa)
fifthly;
LjU
S
s
UjL, (sabl'a) seventhly; L.U (samlne) eighthly;
s
ninthly; Iplc (Mshlra) tenthly
S
.
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
156
SECTION XXIII.
Of
Prepositions.
Besides
or pronoun.
They always follow the substantive
those given in the chapter on the substantive, there are but
four or five others
o
:
o
and ^j-,
^-, (slz)
the
manner
^
(slzln) without,
ja) according
to,
*
(leyin) at the time of, after
of.
SECTION
The
A*, (je,
upon,
s^jjl (uzere)
o
conjunctions
u
XXIV. Of
and
(da)
Conjunctions.
^^io (dakhi)
word they
unite to a preceding one
;
as,
*n*
^.^
I
(gldersan, ben-d& glderim) if thou wilt go,
(bu dakhi)
also, follow the
*
o
t^>
o
* o '
<&i~>
also will go
;
this, too.
All other conjunctions head the clauses which they connect.
The
principal of these are
u, li)
and;
jjjl
(anjaq) only;
ill
(amma),
J^,l
:
j
^Q
(ve, in Persian couplets read
(lakln),
(eyer, eger) z/ ;
'
+
...\i ...b
(ya...ya...) either... or.. .;...*}
s
?ior...;
^t\
^
(hatta) insomuch
since,
by reason that
order that; as far as.
I^G
(ve-lakln) but;
(yakhid) or;
'
...ai (ne...ne...)nez'<Aer...
tliat;js^ (meyer, meger)
(Imdl) therefore, wherefore
(chunku)
^XjJ
Of
;
;
\^
&
these,
Arabic, others Persian in origin.
(zira) for, because
(kl) that
;
U
;
unless;
**-Jj*
(ta) so that, in
some are Turkish, some
ACCIDENCE OR ETYMOLOGY.
SECTION
XXV. Of
a
I
(ah)
help
on
r
ah;
i\jj\
^1
(iiferin,
;
There
is,
(eywah) alas;
i>-ft>
father
;
1
O +
however, a peculiar Turkish interjection
mother.
(a-ana)
now !
;
*>
vulg. iiferlm) bravo.
it
;
as, CGl
as, Ujl
I
(d) 0,
(a-baba)
It also follows nouns, pronouns,
'
see
pre-
(yii)
(khdyf) woe; jj* (meded)
and verbs, taking the sense of Tea! Indeed! I
You
They
^1 (ey), C
:
^
that joins on to the vocative following
U!
in origin.
principal are
* +
c
c**
The
t
Interjections.
These are mostly Arabic or Persian
cede, as in English.
I5'
XX
(adam-a) a
man ; you
see !
told you so!
J^-
'ijjS (gyuzel-a)
nice; indeed! l^j (benlm-a) mine; in sooth! tfjLcs^yf (gydrema-
din-a) thou couldst not see
;
after all
!
158
)
CHAPTER
III.
THE OTTOMAN
SECTION
SYNTAX.
Conversational brevity.
I.
Precision in writing.
COLLOQUIAL and written Ottoman Turkish,
is
as far as Syntax
concerned, are the very antipodes of each other.
As
in the
orthography the rule
a vowel-letter
into
a
Turkish
is
given
or
:
" Never introduce
word
foreign
removing a possible doubt as
to pronunciation
out a vowel
if
in
such a word,
created as to pronunciation,"
as
loquial syntax the chief rule
its
the sake
guage
clear
that
the omission a doubt
is,
equivalent,
and
is
:
is
be always as concise
possible without failing into ambiguity
is
duce
by
;
without
never leave
;
so also, in col-
Never repeat a word, or
intro-
never use a subsidiary word^ unless for
of emphasis; whereas the golden rule for written lan-
is,
and
Never omit any word
explicit.
new words as may,
sought to be conveyed.
that
tends to
make a
sentence
On
the contrary, introduce freely as
in
the requisite degree, elucidate the sense
many
In other words, Spoken Ottoman Turkish
should be as concise as possible, even
to the verge
of ambiguity
;
SYNTAX.
written
Ottoman Turkish must
Io9
be as full, verbally, as to leave
no
doubt on the mind of the reader at any distance of space or time.
The
reasons are obvious and eminently practical, philosophical;
namely:
by reason of a speaker's conciseness, a doubt as
If,
meaning should
his
arise in the
to
mind of the person addressed,
a question can be put, and the doubt at once removed
;
if,
on
the contrary, a written document be left obscure in any part,
the doubt thence arising must remain unsolved, and the mpan-
ing guessed
because the writer
at,
is
either dead or
away
at a
distance.
Hence,
if
one be asked,
^
is
y (^
what
n ^ dlr)
answer, in Ottoman Turkish, will be, for instance,
an apple, as
in English.
Should the question
pomme")
(qarndashimi
my
\yulg.
LJl
(A Frenchman would answer:
be,
(elma)
"C'est
^
^^S^j^ ^^wlj^
JO
une
this ? the
is
'^
JO
,0 f
qardashimi] gyurdunuz-mu) have you seen
brother? the answer will be, either
seen (him), or
^ji(gyurdum) / have
/ have not seen (him).
^j^jjf (gyurmadlm)
Should one say to you, lyu**^
yer-ml-sln)
If I
(yemam) / will not
of "
it,"
As
eat
/ will eat
^> (yeiim)
In this
(it).
even by the asker,
is
to be
instances of the omission of
from phrases
sana versam,
J^> (bunii
give this to thee (you), wilt thou (will you) eat
the answer will be either
(it)?
j**^/j
in conversation,
last question, the
or J^j
omission
remarked.
all
may
(it),
possible subsidiary words
be mentioned that of the
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
1GO
affirmative
^
(dlr)
is,
it
is,
he or she
The
ordinary assertion or negation.
tive possessive pronouns are never
is,
on
love (thee, you,
thee (you),
him, her,
pjy.f
^^
it),
(ben sanl
a?,
^-
-jjiy-
in conversation
employed
;
occasions of
personal and corrobora-
O
unless for emphasis or distinction
all
f
>
pjj.j* (s-avlyirim)
(saul savlyorim)
...) /,
/
7
love
personally, love thee;
^jJ? ^CG (babain galdl) my father came, or has come.
As a consequence
of the desire to leave no doubt as to the
meaning of a writing, nouns and verbs
O fix,
are
much used
such
;
JO Ox
ship, ^jJjl^-k^j
JO)
J
C
are,
o-s^ j
^
(vldd u mdhabbet) friend-
x
j^X (^"'^ u tastir 6lAndu)
its
has been written.
of the avoidance of unnecessary repetition
A. result
the third person singular of a verb
of
in apposition, in pairs,
jj
plural
^
when
often
is
the nominative plural
that
is
employed instead
is
expressed
;
as,
Ox OxO^
(adamlar galdi) some men, or the men have come, or
^jJbT .L^T
came.
Another such
result
is
the use of a singular substantive with
r
a plural cardinal
AJ^_C du-j
waggons,
usual,
;
as,
^,
ol
J
O
j\
(uch at) three horses,
(bin 'araba) a thousand vehicles (carriages, carts,
&c.).
To make
name
number
written composition
after introducing a
still
common
more
precise,
it is
very
substantive or a proper
into a paragraph or article, letter, dispatch, &c., never
to use a personal pronoun to designate the thing or person
161
SYNTAX.
so named, but to repeat the substantive or proper
often as
may
name
as
be required, either preceded or followed by one
Q JQ *
O
O *
J
of the indicative adjectives,
^jj* (mezbur), jj=*.'* (mezkyur),
O
for things or persons,
^\
criminal person,
oo*
J
.j
'
O *
r^*
(mesfur), for a contemned or
for a reputable
^*^-* (tnuma lley-h),
9 - J
person, and A-Jl^U-o (inushfirun iley-h), for a person of rank
and
These words
consideration..
all
said, the afore-mentioned, the said, &c.
first
reality, the afore-
mean, in
In the case of a person
mentioned by name, or by a common substantive, these
words may be used as substantives,
we might
of personal or demonstrative pronoun, in
declension
adjectives to
its
as a kind
the cases of the
all
but, in the case of a thing, they
;
say,
must be used as
name, repeated each time.
SECTION
A common noun
or indefinite, and
II.
Syntax of
the Substantive.
substantive singular
may
may be
either definite
represent, according to circumstances
or the context, either an individual or the individual, several
individuals, a portion of the species, or the
whole species
;
as,
O
sPb (b&ghcha gyfizel shey) a garden
(is)
a pretty thing;
ioU (padishah galdl) the monarch came, or has come;
l
(Ingllterada
geml ch6q)
in
England
(there are)
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
162
many
ships
^
:
jcjj'
duJ^U iL-
*"
the ornaments
dlr) flowers are
*jjsl
30
/ drank
Ichdlm)
(sii
wine, &c.), J&\ j*
nominative;
(sii
%
of
the gardens,
(some) water,
00
+&g\
as,
;
J
of the garden
I drank water
;
(not
indefinite, the substantive is as in the
^j-- (su ichmek)
If the declensional accusative
water).
definite
as,
ziiietl
aqar) water flows.
In the accusative case
p*l
(chlchek baghchaniii
**
to
drink water (some
is
used,
it
is
always
1
j^
(siiyii
Ichdlm) I
drank, or have drunk',
the water.
There are four
two substantives
different
Turkish methods of constructing
in a sentence.
First,
by simple juxtaposition
;
second, by adding the possessive suffix of the third person to
the second substantive
genitive,
and
still
;
third,
first
first
quantity, the second a material;
gold box
O
O+
;
+
JK&. eJJb^-
as,
;
or, the
first
^jS &j^\
first
in-
indicates a
(altin
qutu) a
kll& arpa) a bushel (of) barley
Jj> aJLw_T^j (blr
;
.^
Jji a)JlcL.5oJ (Ikl sa'atllkyol)
coats.
;
and leaving the second unchanged.
dicates a material, the second a form
J
the
some other prepositional
in
In simple juxtaposition of two substantives, the
O
in
adding the possessive suffix to the second
and fourth, by putting the
case,
by putting the
jl
(ftch setrllik
a distance of two hours journey
;
choha) broadcloth enough for three
SYNTAX.
With the
and species
163
possessive suffix alone added, a relation of genus
indicated, the
is
genus standing
bination remaining indefinite
^.^ o
^s**>
;
-
a house (domestic) doy
look-cover; L5>-j^3 jl (ev kyupeyi)
urdeyl) a duck of the wilderness
^s>^\ ^Li (yaban
(J
If the
cluck).
the
definite
With
the
as,
;
the
a proper name, the second
ig>^j Jl/
first in
;
the genitive, real possession
dLcGb (babamin evl)
When
the
first
is
remains without a
the species,
my
the
is
indicated,
and the combination
first,
(qirallii 'askerl)
the king's
army
J
Jjj
*
put into a prepositional case, the second
suffix,
and the combination may be
JO
s
j^i (shehr& y61) a (or
the)
road
to the
2
(demlrdan kyupru) a bridge of iron
kerre) once in a month
When two
definite
in either
;
is)
"
as, \&\
(yazljl efendl)
(who
;
;
o
'/ o
i>jS j->
is
*
(ayd& blr
&c.
is
made
v*s
^U (chawush agha) Mr. Sergeant; ^^\
a Mushir.
the combination
as,
*cBJJ!
*
Mr. Clerk
;
O *O
J
town; (j^>^= u-5-^-3
substantives are in apposition, no change
'
;
father's house.
or indefinite, an active participle being always understood
C
is
(azaq denlzl) the Sea of Azof.
^d^c dJ^
as,
is
;
(wild
the individual, and the combination
name of the possessor being
is definite
(jj\
first is
name of
the
first
and the com(kltab qali) a
L-jlJ-J)
j,lJ
as,
last,
;
liC
^
(mushlr pasha)
the
Here, the generic word stands
definite.
Sometimes, the specific
+
g;^_
Pasha
last,
and
word or
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
164
term
complex and obeys
is
bashi agha) Mr. Corporal
Colonel
ClLj
;
^
\j\
.
*
own
its
dLj
;
rules
<5 Yl^-*
;
as,
\c\
^G
Ojl
(6n-
(mir-alny bey) Squire
the
(mirl-llva pasha)
Major-General
Pasha.
There are two exceptions
stands
last,
when
word
to the rule that the generic
the other
word
is
In
a proper name.
other cases with proper names, this rule
holds
good
;
all
as,
^UaL* Cll (esma sfiltan) Princess Esma, Vj* o)_c (Izzet m6lla)
The
Judge Izzet; ^jJLJl J^ji (arlf Aftndl) Mr. 'Arif; &c.
exceptions are:
1,
reign before his
hamid);
2,
the
the word ^UaL.,
name
word
applied to the sovec
;
as,
J-*J' J-c ^liaL,
when
Vj*,
name
boy, also before his
when
;
as,
(sfiltan abdu-'l-
applied to a student or school-
A_J^
Vj-*
(molla rashld) school-
boy Rashid.
Any number
of them
of substantives
may be
+
\
cjl
the
son, Refiq
5,lay refiq
and one
in apposition,
proper name of the individual
(6ghlum qiilunAz)
(jJ, Jicjl
my
may be
your servant,
my
(6ghlAm refiq bey qulunuz) your
Bey ; j3Cjj5 eL jJ^ ^Vl^-*
bey qulufiuz) your servant,
my
;
as,
son;
servant,
Jl-*j^
(oghliim mir-
son,
Colonel Refiq
Bey; &c.
When
a string of substantives in construction would in
strictness require several of
them consecutively
to be put in
165
SYNTAX.
the genitive case, the monotonous cacophony of the .repetition
of the preposition
is
avoided by omitting
where most appropriate; thus,
JJl
once or twice
it
dLu^u (*k~>*i~>\
ddtjl
(pashanin enishteslnln dayisinin oghlunuii
the horse
ati)
son of the uncle of the brother-in-law of the pasha,
expressed in either of the following ways
rjjo
^,
^
j
dLJcjl
Jil
or
,
^1
.^rjJOJO
Jil
ddcjl
oJjo J
s
dLJLcjl
(^---ib
or
,
jjl
ddcjl
^.^
-
tb
'O
-
dl ;.>...
ib
be
eUlilj
* o s
,
or
*
*
*
Lib
^-Aijijl
-
^Ailil
of the
may
^av.!')!
* *
eL*aii*l Ulj
^'OJ^OJO
x
isL -jlj
:
,o
o
diillb
*
c*Llllj
;
the last
genitive preposition being, perhaps, the most frequently re-
tained and necessary.
Two
or
more Arabic or Persian substantives may be put
Persian construction with each other.
reverse of
what
it
would be
the king's
English
the king.
horse
is
in
Their order
in reverse order
is
effected
by making
consonant of the preceding substantive
J\S\
of
sli,
the
with
the horse
in
of
In Persian construction each preceding substantive
This vocal connexion
sLJ:,
then the
Turkish construction, just as
of a series must be vocally connected with
thus,
is
in
^jL*>_9
the
(fermiinl shah)
its
consequent.
the final quiescent
mo vent
with eser&
command of
;
the king;
fermanl shah! Iran) the tenour
^C,9 ^J+^A (muzmunu.
command of
the king
of Persia.
sonant of a preceding substantive
is
But,
if the last
mo vent, and
con-
followed
by
a vowel-letter, a servile consonant must be introduced to support the eser& vowel of connexion
;
and
this consonant varies
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
166
with the
is
or j
1
final
the servile consonant
,
When
vowel of the word.
is
^
;
as,
the" final
vowel -letter
^G
-J(
^U*
Ox
i
pa-yl esb) the place of the foot of the horse ; du*
^^
yA ru-yu
seg)
^
servile consonant required
needed
-^ sU (^
thus,
;
^
so that no written addition
;
(p&ri-yl chah-1 burj) the fairy
so converted into a consonant; but
If,
requisite.
however, the
the addition of a hemz&
is
vowel-sign
is
the
of
Ignorance often writes a hemze over such
well of the tower.
final
itself into the
this letter is converted
,
\** (mu-
If the final
A0 Aaz'r o/ <A0 face of the dog.
vowel-letter be a
(ja-yl
3
final
vowel be the
a necessity.
is
figured under
it,
$.
it
Usage
really
letter
s
is
,
not
then
Sometimes the esere
is
divided as to the
proper place where the servile hemz& should be written.
is
at times
line
more correctly placed between the two words, on a
with the writing
the sphere (i.e., Aries)
over the vowel
Of two
It
s
;
as,
dJU
;
as,
;
and otherwise
o <"
"
CiJUs
^
&j->
(bere-1 felek) the lamb
it is
less correctly
of
placed
.
substantives in Persian construction, the first is often
the metaphorical
name of the thing
literally
expressed by the
second, the pair really representing one idea under two images
as,
the drover, destiny
^j jJJ' JfJU (scVlq! taqdlr)
;
(o^-c
;
<jl!c
('luanl 'azimet) the reins (of) departure.
Whether
in
Turkish or Persian construction, the same
remark holds good of a pair of substantives, one of which
is
SYNTAX.
167
o o*
the word
o
+
(emr), or one of
^J
a
J j
(j^ai. (khusus), o^n-S
silin
^U
synonyms,
(rnadde),
like.
Thus
for precision.
:
of which signify
all
(keyf lyyet), &c.,
our circumstance, and the
Turkish
its
/-
u>
are used
They
^5LJI J& dJLas*
in written
*\j
(rali-1
tah-
emr-1 Insllaki) the matter of the pursuit of the path of
study; ^>j^^ ^.-J^ diJ^lJj^ (donaumaniS gelmesi khilsusu)
the question
of the coming of the
fleet.
After a proper name of a person or thing, the word Jj (nam)
name,
i/id
is
commonly employed
;
personage named Ahmed;
O
originally
names or
mean
titles
ob Jj j*a.l
*JLJ*
t&
(ahmed nam
zat)
nam
jezire)
LjL_>. (jenilb),
which
(qirim
*ij*
named Crimea.
the island (peninsula)
The two words
as,
"*
O
*
O
o^-i_&. (hazret),
presence,
and
aide, are
^
x
used before or after the
of individuals held in honour, with a meaning
varying from that of His Divine Majesty down to that of plain
Mr. or Mrs., &c.
When
they precede, they remain unchanged
'
to the eye, but are in Persian construction
(hazret-1 khudfi)
(
(
--
peygdmber)
;
O
'
His Divine Majesty, God ;
ZTzs Sanctity, the
Prophet
;
jenab-i padlshah) ^Tzs Majesty, the Sovereign
(
sadaret-ma ab) ZT/5 Highness, the
(the
Grand
5
Vezir).
construction,
,
as,
When
;
Repair of the Vezirate
they follow, they are in Turkish
and generally take the possessive pronominal
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
168
suffix
of the third person plural, but sometimes that of the
third person singular; as,
\cfija* dj^alL *ilVI
'1-lslam tahlr
bey hazretlerl) His Eminence
Chancellor, Tahir
Bey
;
^->U^ ^jlil ^11.
muftlst has&n efendl jenabi)
Brusa, Hasan Efendi ;
j^Ju
(
His Honour
)
the
Interpreter
Noah
Solomon;
Mother)
(
;
^UJu
^-^
(J^-s.
suleymtin)
(
(
(
^j-1
;
-
the
(terjuman
indicates one
L}
as,
;
o^
musa)
(
the prophet
meryem) Saint Mary
'Isa)
)
of
His
&c., &c., &c.
name
of the prophets, saints, or patriarchs of old
(hazretl niih) the patriarch
U^/
Bey;
Generally, the word c^ia. before a single
;
tLjj (burusa
^Jj^ia. lib J-a-, (sef Ir pasha
His Worship
prophet Moses
(sheykhu-
Lord High
the State Counsel
Excellency the Pasha Ambassador ; (jjij^ i&
bey
^
the
the
(king)
(the Virgin
Prophet Jesus
;
^.^
mesih) the holy Anointed One (Christ); &c., &c., &c.
SECTION
III.
Syntax of
Nearly everything requisite
this subject in the
the Adjective.
in a sketch has
former Chapter
(II.),
been said on
Section II.
If several
adjectives qualify one substantive, they follow one another
simply in Turkish construction, and are
OJ
in the Persian construction
;
as, .**.
all
connected vocally
169
SYNTAX.
mahjub chojuq) a
edebll,
^J
1^1 ^Ui irJla
^U
;
pretty, well-behaved, modest child;
(jli-yl
blhlsht-numa-yl ferah-feza) a
paradise-like, joy-giving place.
One
adjective
^L
as,
~J (umem
JLa.1 j
several substantives in a sentence;
may qualify
u
*7ie
ejyall satire)
and
other peoples
nations.
An
Arabic or Persian adjective
Turkish or foreign substantive
before one of these,
it
;
sllolj
remains, like a
~kc
adjectives
take a
restrict their application.
;
as,
is
placed
Turkish adjective, unclL
^Jic
( 'azirn
dagh)
e
( &zlm padlshah) a great monarch,
eJj^ ^A?c (/azlm devlet) a great
Some
never placed after a
and whenever either
changed as to gender or number
a great mountain;
is
state.
substantive as
a complement to
In Turkish construction,
com-
this
j
plement precedes, with or without a preposition
(sii
doto)
ivater.
i
>
lid
(o/) wafer, ^Jji ijj-1 (sa
In Persian construction
beyan) worthy of exposition
;
it
follows
;
;
dolA)
as,
.
i
as, jl^L yo
/Wed
jLj j.V
with
(laylq-
Ja (jJlj* (mnwaffq-! tib') con-
formable with nature.
The Turkish
adjective
^)
(glbl) like, follows substantives,
the personal pronoun of the 3rd pers. plur., the demonstratives
plural, the interrogatives singular
relatives,
in
them
;
when
as,
its
and
plural,
and the compound
complements, without any change occurring
<^ j-c
(sn glbi) like water
;
.^^Ijl
(anler
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
170
like
glbl)
them
like
(klm glbl)
(jp-J
;
(bunlar glbl) like these
^S^J^
whom ?
L?X^ii
^^S^l^
father;
the one belonging to
like
(bendekl glbl)
like the
other pronouns are put in the genitive,
this
word;
^f ~j
as,
glbl) like him, her,
(bunun
glbl) like this
;
c3)-
number
jilifin)
the
as,
;
is
cufo.
made
AI-
to
dol (aniii
you
.
;
f
ctijj
Numerals.
cardinals always precede their
this is usually left in the singular,
(Ikl chlft) two pairs
\
cardinal follows, the construction
five senses;
the
two worlds (present and future).
substantive
^
me;
(slzlii glbl) like
Syntax of
The Turkish and Persian
the
All
have.
&c.
SECTION IV.
substantive, and
I
one
?
my
when complements
like
(benlm glbl)
^>
it ;
what things
(neler glbl) like
^-SCxoLb (babamliikl glbl)
^S^LS
;
plural
;
as,
^lli.
ejl^a. (jlhatl sltte)
made
is
^jjjj
;
jC^
But
jj>
(du
the Arabic
Persian,
(qiivayl
whatever
and the
khamse)
the
the six directions (in space),
six sides (of a solid).
The Turkish and Persian numerals precede the
the same substantive
substantive)
goats;
;
thus,
s,j*ju> *Jjl
;
as
^^
adjectives of
do also the Arabic (though after the
aL*
^jl
(Ikl
slyah kechl)
two black
e^ia (heft lqlim-1 rna'mure) the seven climates
SYNTAX.
of
the habitable earth
hlre)
*\
;
6
171
a.
khamse-1
(j\j (qiivayi
the Jive external senses.
But
instead of an adjective, a descriptive phrase should
if,
comes between
qualify the substantive, the Turkish numeral
the two; as, e>oj^>
biyunda blr Ip) a string
'
,~ .^ '
J^j? du<ijl (odanln
' O'
o',o-
of the length of the room; y*UJ!
blii
zfi-
(^Jj jjol
a^l A~-^
^
<_/>* (her
besh keys& aqcha eder yedl elmds) seven diamonds, each of
the value
of Jive purses of money.
A Turkish cardinal
number can be placed
It does not then define the
in the genitive, singular or plural.
number of
that substantive, but of a definite portion of
this represents
o
man;
" c
as,
;
^
what
dU^l (adamin blrl) one of mankind, a
si*
one
\zp i^Ujl (adamleiifi blrl)
(odauln
after a substantive
two rooms,
Iklsl)
of the men;
^^^J^
(odalarin Iklsl) two of
the rooms.
Very
often,
between the Turkish cardinal number and
substantive, another substantive
its
introduced, with the sense
is
" ten head
of individual or individuals, as in our phrases
of
cattle,"
"six sail of ships," &c.
Turkish according
numeral.
For men
head
^J,
(re's)
^Wi
(qlt'a) piece
it is
Ju
for bulbs
;
;
This substantive varies in
to the nature of the things defined
(nefer) individual
it is
^ib
for cannons, ships,
;
by the
for beasts
(bash) head; for ships
and
it is
it is
villages, it is ijj (pare,
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
172
vulg. paii) piece ; for things usually counted
number;
for things not usually counted
tana) berry ; for swords
^j
:
J
Jive
^jc
is
('tided)
A-ib (dilne, vulg.
A.i_ls (qabza) hilt
it is
Thus
chain.
it
is
it
for elephants,
;
^
men;
JJT,
^1
^o onzows
ships
;
AISU
^^-j
^
twenty vessels ;
(pieces of artillery); [$jf ifc
a hundred eggs
Jl\
;
Aib
000,0
swords
;
J-3
^ij
The Turkish
(blrlnjl geyje)
d6qiizAnju
^>
fifty villages
^o
(^jj
;
_L5
pearls;
^-
'
C>
one elephant.
ordinals precede their substantives
^e /rs*
m^^
;
;
as, AS
jjL JLJLjT
$i\
s^j
(dltmlsh
the sixty-ninth regiment.
filay)
The Arabic
$\
cannon
^jl ^ew
L->jL s^U
ordinals follow; as,
^^U.
t-jb
(biibl khfimls)
chapter the fifth.
The
Persian ordinals
generally
precede,
but
sometimes
follow.
The Turkish
distributive numerals are used to express the
O
Ox-
rates of collection as well as of distribution
;
as,
(besher pard verdller) they contributed five paras each
^jJ^-ij
5^,0
(anlari besher padl veiildl)
to
x
Ji^
;
*"
^
^
Ox +
jZj>
s^Lil
them five paras each
were distributed.
For emphasis
sake,
the
simpler
distributives
are
often
173
SYNTAX.
repeated
but they are then generally used as substantives
;
.
(blrer blrer t6pladim)
Xl
I collected (them)
as,
;
one by one;
(Iklsher Iklsher aliniz) take ye (them) two
two together
apiece each (of you), or, take you (or thou, them)
each time.
SECTION V.
The
Syntax of Pronouns.
when an
demonstrative pronoun,
Js5
dJc^T
(bii
substantive
uch blyuk gyuzel
handsome, nubile
The
its
;
precedes
adjective,
O
other qualifications of
all
-
J>Sf O
J
O
-f
gellnlik qiz)
these three tall,
girls.
suffixed possessive pronoun
necessarily attached to
its
is
not, in literary style,
substantive, but to the last
word
of the combination of substantive, adjective, &c., to which
O
may
+*
it
O JO"
Thus, ^jj *y*j* (merhum pederlm) my
belongs.
J
as, Jjj-i &jt-> fj\ j>
late father,
be rendered in the Persian form,
merp*py*jjj (peder-t
humum)
;
so also,
j+\j>.Jb\L
manner desiderated
^^^jLk
in
(aqtar-i
o.t.4)
(vejh-1 khatir-kh'fihlmiz) the
mind by us
(i. e.,
sharqiyye
ser-'asker-l
by me)-,
jdc^
AJ^^llaSl
^
ill
of
(S^rjt (bu
the
zafer-rehberl)
Ox
victorious commander-in-chief
^Ual
A&.J
the eastern districts
;
^
J
jjb vs\j
y
O
^
bdghln her blr ja-yi jan-feza-yi
bihlsht-intlmiisl) each soul-enrapturing, paradise-prognosticating
spot of this garden.
The
corroborative
of the suffixed possessive pronoun of
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
174
Turkish construction precedes the whole combination to which
the possessive
is
suffixed
the genitive, whether
j_i
and
;
this corroborative is
always in
be a substantive or a pronoun
it
(benlm merhum pederim) my
late
;
as,
father
;
(odanin blyuk qapiisu) the great door, of the
room.
One
possessive suffix
may
ojtc j uAj^l j
^Cll j
Jl
qualify several substantives
(al
A
as-hfib
'itret
li
;
A ahbabi)
as,
his
family, companions, posterity, and friends.
SECTION
Verbs of the
first
VI
Syntax of
and second person agree with their nomi-
number and person
natives in
the Verb.
saw, have seen (him, her,
it,
as,
;
&c.)
;
^
*Sj*p
^JCj^^i
(ben gyurduin)
j
(slz
/
gyurdunuz)
you saw, have seen (me, us, them, &c.).
A verb
if
of the third person must also agree with
understood;
as,
^jf(gyurdu)
When
the subject
is
politeness
;
its
it
A
in number.
singular
verb in the plural, out of respect or
a plural subject often has
so as to avoid the
&c.).
(it,
expressed of a verb of the third person,
the verb does not always agree with
subject sometimes has
subject,
saw, has seen (it,&c.);
he, she, it
have seen
Jbi.^j^gyurduler) they saw,
its
its
verb
cacophony of repetition.
in the singular,
Thus
:
175
SYNTAX.
(bibim
gitdll&r)
my father
went, has gone,
zs
gone
;
(ushaqlerl galdl) his or their servants came, or have come, are
come.
So a verb with several subjects expressed, when
third person, singular or plural,
O
O
*>
*
O
*Q J
*
Ju\2> J\j&. \-Jj~oj
jS
shay an
cllr)
^O
J
-*
^^>j
may
If one of
as,
;
JJ
(uluf-1 rizvan
<-_sj)l
A
sunuf-i gufrfm
thousands of prayers for God's acceptance^ and all
kinds of wishes for God's mercy (on him, &c.)
'
of the
all
be in the singular
is
(are) fitting.
them be of the second person, singular or
plural,
and the other or others of the third person, the verb must be
O ^*-
of the second person plural
as,
;
O
f
-S'O* ** ^ ^f"
-9^
J x
^xjj^i j\j> jXJiS^J j
O
^^
*
^>j
(san ve pederlm ve q6ushunAz b^raber gltdliilz) tlwu
O
-*
(j*
and my
father, with your neighbour, went together.
And
if
one be of the
person, even singular, whether the
first
others be of the second or third, singular or plural, the verb
J j o
must be
in the first person plural
(ben, ve san, ve qarndashin,
brother,
saw (him,
In conversation,
at the
as,
it
J__ o
tsb^jb
gyurduk)
/,
,o-^0x,o^
i^ilji^ j
and
thou,
^
^
^
and thy
&c.).
^
and
its
plural
^
are generally omitted
end of a phrase, affirmative, negative, or interrogative
^Jj_5C^(keyflnlz
is
as,
;
good ;
But,
another,
in
J&
(ty
repeating
lyl
dlyll)
ml)
it is
is
your health
good? j^(lyl)
not good.
the affirmative
must be introduced
;
;
as,
or
^jJ
negative words
of
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
176
(buyle
dlr,
deyu,
t&sdlq
eyledl)
Tie
confirmed,
saying,
" It
is so."
In relating the words of another, no alteration
in
number, person, or tense of the verb
dldl)
lie
"
said,
would come
When
/
will come
"
as,
;
^jjj
is
permitted
(gellrlm,
+j<
"
he said he
(not as in English,
").
the object of a transitive verb
the accusative
as, *jJl
;
taken) the horse.
But,
aldim)
Jil (atl
ol
/
is
in
put
bought, have bought (or
be indefinite,
if the object
the nominative; as,
^il
is definite, it
I
(at aldun)
it
remains in
bought a horse or
horses.
Intransitive,
objects
like
by means of
verbs, govern
transitive,
different prepositions,
i.e.,
their
indirect
the substantives
or pronouns are put into different cases according to the verb.
Thus
:
(3*5^5 eJ^jb'
J^jJjl
sC
into
swim
AJIS^IJ
Ichln
<&).&
to
(ulumdun qachmaq)
(paraya baqmaq)
to look at
in the water; es)u^.^
to strike
yapmaq)
*_j1-
8^=j
bathe in the sea)
with a (or
to
the)
;
to be
sword
&>\
;
(i.e.,
to take
^-> (suda
(defilz^
\$+j
afraid of death
yuzmek)
girmek)
A
jj^-jU
9
to
go into
to
(qillj
U>?^
money
Ha wur-
j^*
(khatir
do (a thing) out of regard (for some one)
(haywand blnmek)
to
;
run away from death ;
money
account or consideration) ; (&jji
the sea (i.e., to
maq)
(^ um dan qorqmaq)
mount on a
beast
(florae)
;
;
SYNTAX.
mount (go) on board ship
(gemiye blnmek)
to
(ayagha qalqmaq)
to rise to one's
/^
(i. e.,
;
to rise,
get up, stand up).
place are often used adverbially (as also
Nouns of time and
is
the case in English) without prepositions after verbs
J^^C
(yarln gal) come to-morrow
^
;
en) descend, come or go down; j^a. (jj&
mount
;
i.
come or go up.
e.,
them
are used with
the right;
Jb Jjl
;
(s6la b&q) look to the left
O,
from
A
transitive verb
etdller) they
An
;
J>
,
>
/
cPj^J (gerldan
;
has sometimes
other indefinite;
as,
Jb
two
v\
JL^jJ.J^(glni,
gal) com^
/rom
Ottoman compound verb, active or
(ani
j,l
Persian complement of
(bii
its
daqiqaya
passive, often takes
as,
O
(sarf-i muzjat-i blza'a qilindi)
capital
was made
(i. e.,
;
^
-
-
J
J.^-a^ <u<ji;9Jjj
eyledl) he acquired
vwuquf
cognizance of (about) this subtle point
as the
body of the verb,
nominal factor;
tahsili
mushir
field-marshal).
o-
5/j
the
direct objects, one
j~Z*
made him a mushir (duke, or
direct or indirect object into the
(jjJbl
to
behind.
definite, the
its
(yuqari chiq) ascend,
on occasions, prepositions
dcU> (saghd sap) deviate (turn)
as, u->l
vulg. geii git) go back
rear,
Still,
as,
;
^p\L\ (ilshaghl In, vulg,
t^jJLS
s
'
^^
expenditure of the
the modicum of capital
was
OS
' O J
^*>*
^
',*>
modicum of
spent).
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
178
SECTION VII.
Syntax of the Participle.
In conversation, the substantive qualified by a
or passive,
is
sometimes understood, and the participle
as a substantive; as,
(or her)
that
who comes
;
^&
The
(gelan& ver) give (thou
is
used
it) to
him
^C; A^oA-Ji (gldlylmA baqma) look not at
which I wear ; A*^
what I
particle, active
(yapajaghimi sorma) ask not
-*ia.jj\j
shall do.
active participle present of Jjj',
i.
e.
J$j\
is
,
often
o^
omitted after Arabic participles,
Jjij j dJC.
Jlj
sjJ^JClI
(r&b'i
active or passive
;
as,
IL-J,
meskyundd vwaqf memallk
li
b&ldan) the countries and towns situated in the inhabited quarter
(of the globe);
mentioned in
8
jjl_L^sjj (bu kltabda mez-
the sciences
and matters of knowledge
uJjUaje^^.^.x*
kyur f&nun A ma'arlf )
this book.
Active participles govern
all
their objects in the
as the verbs from which they derive
;
same way
so also do the passive
participles, excepting only the object they each qualify as an
adjective
as,
;
^Wl ^J
(qapii achan)
yjUl .cij-9 (q&P^yii achan) he
jj li>J*S
ij jf
opened with
mlii
(ellm
my hand ;
116
who
ivill
nvt be able
achdfghim qapA) the door that I
L_>--.
to
who opens a door ;
(that which) opens the door;
(jT^A^sjol JjJ j,^ d^,J^ (pederl-
bAnA qabul Idemeyejeyl sebeb)
father
he
accept
this.
the reason for
which
my
SYNTAX.
The Persian and Arabic
with
rally,
their
participles are constructed, gene-
in
objects,
participles. were substantives
du
jlhau), jJilU-
(^jl^s..
of both worlds ;
jt
.i
J^-J
J^-i
179
;
the
same manner as
(jl^^^a
as,
(her da jlhanfn
1
the
In
li
khjillq!) the
^/1 .^a. (reside
the battlement
3!
of
and
this
kyungyure-
3!
Creator
(makhluq-u yed-1 qudretl),
Ji^-i
hand of His almighty power ; ^\j ^J
an) the Creator of
the
jJU. (khallq-i her
^^U.* (sbjl^jj j^j (yed-1 qudretlerlnlii makhluqu)
of
if
g&jjjj^sl
that (all things);
charkh-1 eslr)
ly/izcA
the creature
(aferlnende-
ii^Cj^o--^
has reached
the ethereal sphere.
But sometimes Arabic
active participles of transitive verbs
govern their direct objects as do their verbs
C -u. ^s^j^ssj^ (keyf lyyet-1 mezkyure-1
;
mubin)
thus,
.- <^-*
ivhich explains
the said circumstance.
SECTION VIII.
Syntax of
the Verbal
Nouns and
Infinitive*
Turkish verbal nouns are constructed with their subject?,
when
substantives, as
(ahmedln galmesl)
any two substantives
the
;
thus,
^*J6
isJj>.)
coming of Ahmed, Ahmed's coming
;
action of) having
.^jAo dJvvl (ahmedln galdlyl) Ahmed's (past
come
;
^>^T^Jj^a.l (ahmedln
gelejeyl)
Ahmed's (future action
of) coming.
When
the subject
is
a pronoun,
it is
put in the genitive
stil',
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
180
and the Turkish verbal noun takes the possessive
subject's
number and person
coming
CtL5sjJ
;
;
as,
^
*.**
suffix
of the
my
(benlm galmem)
CtL- (sanln galdlyin) thy having come
d^JLJl
;
(auleiin galejekleii) their future coming.
^j&>.t
Turkish verbal nouns and
their objects, direct or indirect, exactly as their verbs
Ad^Tji
(anl
gyurmem) my
with
infinitives are constructed
seeing
him
(her, it}
(lzmlr& galejeyln) thy future coming to
;
Smyrna
thus,
;
dx^Js
^*)1
<<*)j*a.l
A^,JJ
ahmedln dun mektub yazdlghi)
ifi^i vj-*^-* UJ J (pederlna
Ahmetfs having written a
letter to his
father yesterday.
Arabic verbal nouns are constructed with their agents sometimes in the Turkish, sometimes in the Arabic, and sometimes
o J JJ
in the
Persian manner
;
dJLas? (tahsilln) thy study;
sun'u
'llah), 2\
as,
^^
e^s?
11 (sun-i llah)
(vurudim) my arrival
(tahrirl) his writing;
the act
of God;
4]
Jjf jj
;
A^
I
H}*\
the
(Idare-i pergyar-1 efkytir) a revolving of the compasses of
thoughts.
Arabic verbal nouns are constructed with their objects
the same manner as the
compound verbs formed of them
(maqduii sarf ) an employing
Ul^
an acquiring
one's utmost
(fann-1 jagraflyayi tahsila
the science
of geography.
;
;
in
as,
c^j
medar) a help
But they may
to
also be
constructed with them as two simple substantives, either in
SYNTAX.
the Turkish or Persian manner;
Os
*
and again,
In
^sO^
O
AJLaa:
d^U]^
181
^o
as,
'
vt
+ +
s
^
or
so
d^jju or
s
'
vJ
G-"
^ J-^';
uU1^
&c.
cases excepting their construction with their subjects
all
or objects, the Turkish verbal nouns
and
infinitives are con-
structed in sentences exactly like any other substantives
so*
O
jy
j$
tins
;
O
-"O
Q
*<~>
to die
better
z*5
than
^jJLJU. ti-+_LJjj9 (qurtAlmagha chalishdi) he laboured at
+M>\ t_^J/
^^\ ^lj (ydqmaq
arranged, have arranged
mesl
as,
;
J
^jJjj dijjl (dlraek biindan evla dir)
escaping
/
*
lilzim dlyll)
,.t.
his
coming
(is)
to
my
is
are not
J^j
w^
c/owJ< exists,
Syntax of
much used
in conversation
O O
its
e.,
Gerunds.
the
;
there the
broken up into as many sentences as
needed, each with
i.
being able to go.
SECTION IX.
The gerunds
;
wo< necessary;
(glde-bllejeylme shub-hem var)
a doubt as
discourse
/or burning
(it)
ichln tertib etdlm)
personal verb
;
O"
O
may be
o^O O^"
r*,oj
^^^^ ^jJa *$jy +*&
as,
(gltdlm, gyiirdAm, galdlm, kh&ber verdlm) /
ivent
;
I saw ; I
came ; I gave information.
But, in the literary style, one long phrase, ending with one
personal verb, will contain a
number of
with a gerund (which thus acts to the
eye, like our
commas and semicolons)
;
clauses, each ending
ear, as well as to the
as,
sjjTjJ^d^jj^vj^P
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
132
o, x
o
o
jj> (gld&p, gyArerek, galdlkde, khaber verdlm),
^j>_j
and
seeing,
verbs are used, the auxiliary gerunds
JJ
O
be omitted once or twice in a long sentence
J
o
i__>jjj_l
going
on coming back, reported.
When compound
o
7,
*
J 9 o
r<
o
*
^jjtj^ljl.^
In
....
f
may
O, O
j^j 4*-^
^j
* +
(
sjjl
j (blr mevzi'a vurud, ve anda blr mlqdar
qA'iid edup, ....) ...arriving at
there awhile,
as,
;
a certain place, and
this case,
to be introduced in lieu of the
sitting
down
however, a conjunction requires
gerund omitted; as
seen in
is
the example given.
The
subjects,
and direct or indirect
objects, of the
are constructed as with their verbs.
gerunds
But, as the gerunds
cannot indicate the person and number of their subjects, the
appropriate personal pronoun must be expressed before them,
J
O
when
the subject
is
not a substantive
;
as,
(adam kltab 6qAyAb) man, reading a look
O'tJO
+
C^Tj' J-"lj
*
shu.
f*\*j
(fermanim
adaml gyurerek)
/, seeing that
The adverb precedes
,
^j&
^-
o
-^
>
0-_x
+*\
;
c^W
;
man,
&j*jj>
;
s>*\
what time
j^
^
(ben,
&c.
Syntax of the Adverb.
the verb or adjective qualified by
it
;
(sdbahleyln galdl) he came in the morning;
J
r Of?
-,
(or books),
size vwfisil olijaq) at
shall attain unto you,
SECTION X.
,
f
o
i_jl
"to*
*J-~?
my command
J J
c-jj-jj-Jjl
( chi(l g.vtiz
^) very pretty.
SYNTAX.
The
J
negative
(dlyll)
183
wo, precedes the verb substantive,
expressed or understood, but follows the substantive or adjective
which
young
;
The
negatives;
__.>
as,
^S
(y^J/Sj j^)ff. (dqlsiz dlyllsln)
(adim
.,^1
ji J$j
it
dlyll dlr) he or
eb
adverbial suffixes
noun of time,
it is
(genj dlyllim)
I am
not
tlwu art not unintelligent
not a
&c.
man;
follow
0%ln),
(dek), ^.^=>*
place, or condition, in the dative
^
as,
;
;
:
a
<^-*> Aa-CI
(sabaha deyln) until morning ; ebjjj^jjj) (londurayadek) as far
as
London
until death.
eb,ujf,l (illumedek)
;
third gerund also, put in this
a verbal limit of time;
o *
*
;
'Q
+
e)j,u^lj
letter
^
diWA^Jup
as,
*
*
O>J
J
^
and thus form
(gellnjeyedek) until
(ben gidtnjeyedek) until
(I,
or under-
I go
(or went);
+
(mektubiim 6raya varinjayadek) until my
*>>^L
Ajl^l
eb^u"
case,
The agent must be named
thou, &c.) come, came.
stood
as,
same dative
follow the
They
reach (or reached}
The
there.
decided by the context,
in
like
tense of this gerund
manner
as
its
is
agent and
object.
The adverb
(gydre) according, also follows a dative
s^j-J
;
1
as,
s,Jj <ulac
("aqlima gyure) according to
(band gyure) according
The adverbs
tively,
to
(yana),
my judgment ;
.j
feu
me ; &c.
^V>
(d6layi),
follow substantives or infinitives
(kltabdan d61ayi)
^1
in
(Aturu) rela-
the ablative
relatively to (about)
a (or
;
as,
the)
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
184
book
j
jjf
;
relatively to (about,
(gltmekdan uturu)
concerning) going.
Although
is
it
not grammatically erroneous, in answering a
question, to use the affirmative adverb ojl (evet) or
yes, or
the negative
^
^
(bell)
oo*
o
when
(yoq) or^i. (khayr) no,
priate, it is unidiomatic to
do
The more
so.
whether one of those adverbs be used or
appro-
general custom,
not, is to repeat the
word or words of the question on which the interrogation
turns, with such
grammatical modifications as
Thus, turning back
sect.
21
(p. 151-2), the respective answers
I (am
(evet, ben)
yes,
no, the
after
day
;
to ride); 2,
0/jgJjl
may
be
7
51),
and in Chap.
J
always
follows
in truth
('ale 't-tahqlq)
fact
;
J'i.
y>
II.,
^
oj\
4
5
(p. 82),
III., section 8
(p.
(p.
gj^
;
\Jj
word
the
is
it
seen in
88), 6 (p. 89),
179)
Arabic and Persian prepositions always precede;
out change);
1,
Syntax of the Preposition.
preposition
II., sections 1 (p.
(p. 90),
Chap.
:
(yoq, 6lblr gyun)
governs, noun, pronoun, or verbal derivative, as
Chap.
necessary.
&c.
SECTION XI.
The Turkish
may be
to the five questions instanced in
;
as,
but the
j-5^ <J&
(ber qarar) in permanence (with-
('ala hide) singly;
(bl-eyyl halln) in
jJ^Jl
any case
;
<3 (fl '1-wiiqf) in
iy!^j2l
ft Jc
(
'ala
185
SYNTAX.
't-taqdiieyn)
upon
either supposition;
jj~$
(ez ser-1
from a new beginning (over again, again).
A
may govern two
preposition
*
sentence
posterity,
;
as,
and
3,0s
'O
,0 s
A^UJj OT^J
more substantives
or
a
in
*l*
V^'j J^
his family,
*
companions,
friends.
But, as the Arabic and Persian preposition precedes the
adjectives that qualify, as well as the substantives qualified,
so the Turkish preposition
placed after
is
when
quently, in Persian construction, and
all
these; conse-
the substantive
followed by the possessive suffixes, the Turkish preposition
separated from the substantive
siderable distance
;
(bii
&
*}
as, Jbl
it
is
governs, sometimes by a con-
JjC (baba-m
(qallyun-i
with
my
father
;
this faithful
friend
;
lie)
muhlbb-i sadfq-dd) in
j-^jfc
is
kyuh-numun-i h&mayunun
bash!) the head of the mountain-like imperial galley.
SECTION XII.
Syntax of
the Conjunction.
All conjunctions, except the enclitic
too, also,
The
the
head the phrase they belong
:
(de, da),
enclitic conversational aa, or liteiary
word of a phrase
thus
.>
to
which
or^o
(d&khi),
to.
^.3,
is
placed after
special attention is directed
;
or Istanb6danda
tfjlSTlijL^ ^jJJjCLl (Istanbildan dakhl,
top galdl) cannon came from Constantinople also
;
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
186
(istauboldan t6p dakhl galdl) cannon,
too,
came from
Constantinople.
This
enclitic
repeated after each
is
linked together by
its
use; as,
sjj
member
sjjj
*,.xp
Ox
san-da) /, too, will go, as also thou
uchumuz
(ben-da, san-da, 6-da,
;
jj*~^=>
of a phrase
(ben-da gederlm;
flJJJ
*0
_>^
*<dj\
gldeiiz) /, thou,
and he
SO'
*0*
8jkl-J
*^J
-
too, will
all three go.
It
is
often placed after a verb in the conditional,
being then, in English, rendered by even
even should he come
be
S^A-J^
;
;
^^^(galmlsh
as,
sense
j A-J> (galse-de)
he
Ise-de) even though
come; sj(_jlj6 (galseydl-da) had he even come
(galejek 6lsa-da) even should he be about
its
;
oj-Jjl
d^d
to
come (even should he
it
is
think of coming, or resolve to come).
After other verbs than conditionals,
enclitic
with each
that enters a phrase, and answers to our both, followed by
or also; as,
come,
and
sj^JS sj^jK
see also
;
(gelliim-da,
gyururdm-da) /
sj^jSl +**~)\ jj&-> **jjj-$
/
beyanlr-lse-m, allrim-da)
will come,
and I
**jjX
(
will see,
and
will both
,
and
if
I
admire, will also buy.
The
conjunctions
or whether,
u*^>\
^^\
in the sense of whether
jL\ d/^ ^,
(eyer)
,
if,
with A^(ger-chl,
;
as,
,
vulg. gerche) or
the
(eyer-chl, vulg. egerche) although, put
of their phrase in the conditional
...
verb or verbs
A-lj^U iLj^U (ha galse,
SYNTAX.
18
h4 galmasa) whether he come, or (whether he come) not;
OO-"
+
s
da) although he be even come (even
When
it
is
its
O
>
<'
sjju-jj (JiJ^ *-*:j^=*\
(eyer galsa) if lie come;
(egerchl galmlsh Isa-
though he be come).
the copulative j joins one verb or phrase to another,
(to a certain degree)
pronounced ve, in conformity
original Arabic pronunciation
it
struction,
but when, in Persian con-
;
two nouns, substantive
unites
with
or adjective,
it
takes
the vowel-sound of a or A, and joins on, in pronunciation, as
though
(*jf}
in
a syllable, with the consonant preceding
(jjJb (galdl
(devlet u
Iqbal)
and
healthy.
conjunction
in
pronoun
always connects two
that,
(kl)
Turkish
;
as,
iS
(as
it
J
,
}
.^
as a conjunction)
really is in Persian, as well
+j** (ma'lum ola kl) be
Jjl
or reason of that which precedes
the conjunction
;
^
O
be rendered \yjfor or because;
9
*
to be a
it
known
Sometimes the clause that follows shows the cause
that
O
as,
(qavi-yu
members of a phrase, and should never be supposed
relative
;
JL^j ^3*
^
fortune and prosperity ; eu-^JjJ j
ten-durust) strong
The Persian
ve gyurdu) he came, and he saw;
it
Jo J
OOx
^jaJ (jjJjl dLil ^tt
as,
j
^
t
{
*
s
^\S Jlij
then
may
O
* *
J<sJ^I
O
XO
^
J^*j^i
^xxOX
AJ^aix*
(nlyjizmend
6l^l!in,
jlns-1 magferete sim-1 eshk 6ldu niiqud)
plications,
<o
O **,''*
and assiduous
let
ve nale-kyunan, kl
us be instant in sup-
in moans, for the silver
of (man's)
tears
has been made the coins payable for the wares of (God's) mercy.
i
O
-oJ JJ
3^3
(The inversion ^HJ
^jjjl
for
(jdj\ Jjij
is
poetical.)
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
188
After a verb signifying
to
say (which also
to think),
self,
what
was, or will be said or thought
is,
;
used by the speaker or thinker
(s6rdu
kl,
and
O*
as,
&j*
^^6 ^Jj
What
is this
very words,
>s
?
(dly6r kl,
y
We
A_J
(j^jf
see, then,
the equivalent of our sign of quotation, the
We
cannot alter the phrase as
is
our custom,
in,
a certain style, this
A_J
omitted
is
as,
;
O >
J(i^>
(^Jjo (dldl
<j\
But
the
:
ey shehrlyar) he exclaimed,
method more generally used,
tion,
and which
was
said, asked, or thought,
the verb
Ox 01
as,
say
say, he says he will come, or he asked what that was.
Occasionally,
Ox
dlr) he asked,
is
inverted commas.
;
in the
I will come to-morrow ;
yarln gellrlm) he says,
that 4$7 so used,
to
but the question must
be in the mood, tense, number, and person,
bu ne
may mean,
or to ask, the conjunction A_$"introduces,
to one's
is
is
to
quote
and then immediately
first
what
to bring in
proper tense, number, and person;
*
jjyjjjjv
(gellrlz dlyorler) they say,
say they will come
did not
its
monarch.""
especially in conversa-
the true Turkish mode,
to say, fyc., in
O
"
see
;
We
will come;
cJo.i +s~*jjJ> (gyurmadlm didl)
(him, her,
it,
them, you, &c.)
;
i.
e.,
i.
lie
they
e.,
said,
he said he did
o
not
In this
see.
case, if the
verb \ised be any other than
*
eiUjo,
the Turkish conjunction jjo (dlyu, vulg. deye), which really
o *
the
first
or AO
tion
;
,
or fifth gerund, modified
is
it
I
o
by usage, of iUp,
viz.,
is
J
^^
introduced before the verb used, and after the quotais
the equivalent of our saying
;
as,
^
^
SYNTAX.
IjJLl Jljl (keyfinlz lyi-ml,
189
dlyii, su'al
or her), saying, Is your health yood ?
$\
jjf_>\
*
deny, saying.
We know
not ; I jll Uji.
formed an
jjjsi (belmeyirlz,
not
Jo 3-^3*^
idea, saying (to
;
i.
e.,
what
e.,
dlyii,
7 asked
him
(of
/ asked how
was ;
he
inkyar Idly6rler) they
they deny,
and say
they
know
(galmazslnlz, diyu, khulyd etdlm)
/
myself), You will not come
/
imagined that you would not come
dlniz) saying
i.
etdlm)
;
^_Xj_jJS
(to thyself), ar
j_o AJ (ne
come?
thou
i.
;
e.,
dlyii, g^,l-
t^Aai
a?'e
sometimes, as in Persian, serves
to
i.e.,
you come for?
The
coDJunction A_>
connect an incidental qualifying phrase to an antecedent noun,
as though
it
were a
relative
pronoun ; but
in such case
it
never
undergoes declension or takes a preposition, the following
o
phrase being complete in
all
its
parts
;
as,
J
J^l
c
^
i o'
^L-. j
jk*.
,jj
(hamd A
slpas 61 khiidavend-l bi-'lllete seza dlr, kl, vAjud-1 enhar
u qu'ur-1 blhar yek-qatre-1 qudret-1 na-mutenahllerl
lauds are worthy of that uncaused
power
the existence
of
rivers
and
dlr) glory
Lord God, of whose
the depths
and
infinite
of oceans are but a
single drop.
The
foregoing example shows that
impossible to distinguish
is
it
is
often difficult or
whether the phrase that follows A_^
x
a qualificative, or the exposition of a reason.
We
might
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
190
take
it
and translate
in this latter sense,
:
for, the existence
of
rivers, #c., are but one drop, &c.
But, in ethical works and the like, generally composed by
members of the
'Alemii class
(Doctors of Canon
Persian or Arabic model, the clause that follows
qualificative,
*Jjl
&
and the
style
4*c u*r* J?*
..ti
e
lid habl-1 metin-1
is
Thus
anti-Turkish.
aql& mtUeshebbls 61a,
shall take hold of the firm cable
m^nzur
generally
:
)
dAr,
every one
;
who
of reason with the hand of
^ jjuL* &j-siJb.>i!>^jy\Lj>
;
n&zar-l 'ibret-U
Law) on a
is
^+*> ^>** (her kes kl dest-1 hlmmet
4-i^
endeavour,
A)
)
these
(bii janverler kt
animals which are
looked upon with a regard for instruction,
The
conjunctions
kl) perhaps,
lest,
(me-badfi kl)
lest,
aJU
(ta kl) in order that,
^
&jt^* (meyer
be in the optative
jAj\
I)$L
i"Cl.
4,1 ji4ji
(
*>
;
^U
A-JU j*.*: A_)
as,
m^uhezlm
jjll (
A-5CIbU
^^W
X
(
(shayed
^bC
X
kl) unless, require their verbs
i.X
,
tiihtlmmAlu
(
qalmaya) in order that no power of endurance
^JAJjl
j)ll
A-L].>1* (m^-dam-kl) as long as, since,
,XO-
to
&S
be left in
him
;
6laler) lest they be routed;
hayfitdd 61aler) since they are alive;
(
^y
1
^ o1 ^)
gyuzel olA) unless he
lest {i be s
i
*
(she, it) be beautiful.
191
SYNTAX.
SECTION XIII.
Some
interjections are
some by nouns
Syntax of
the Interjection.
accompanied by nouns and pronouns,
only, others have no accompaniment, and some
precede verbs.
When
accompanied by a noun, the noun
is
always
in the
nominative, excepting with the interjection jjLj (yaziq)
,LjLj
(vwakh babam)
\)
vulg. afeiim
slz)
!
(yaziq
its
my
When
(j-~j
(J.XP
jjlj
trouble
^~u1 ^jJ)
sir
I
(fiferin,
(gldl edeb-
well, brother!
Cjl (merhaba
*Ju*l
They always precede
used in this
way
but
also,
;
as,
j^lj (yaziq emeylme) alas
it
further
*X_Il
my
the
j-.lj
trouble
!
I
accompanied by a pronoun, except the interjection
(gldl),
tf.j-*\
is
^^Jl
J-Cjl
substantive to be put in the dative
the pronoun must be in the dative
(yaziq band) poor
B^JLJl
is
emeylm), A5Cj
alas for
!
!
(&man chojughum) 0, my child!
The word
permits
father
^jj,* ^T (ey qardashim)
efendlm) God's blessing on you,
noun.
my
oghlum) well done, my boy
0, impudent fellow
fW (J^
alas,
as,
;
me
!
^L^
;
as,
j
j^b
alas for thee
~\j (vwiikh sana)
(aferlm S,nlard) well done,
The
thy !
!
exceptional
constructed with the accusative of the second person
singular,
which
sanl) or
^^^L
it
may
precede or follow
;
as,
^ ^f
(gldl
(sanl gldl) faugh, thou (good-for-nothing)
!
OTTOMAN TURKISH GRAMMAR.
192
Interjections indicative of a desire for the future or regret
for the past, are constructed with the conditional, aorist or
past accordingly
t*J6
as,
;
si
that
^j-llTsl (ah galseydl)
^Ul
is
,
;
own
my
he
had come
would come
One of
!
!
these,
constructed also with the imperative, and expresses
vehement
tive
that he
(ah galsa)
desire with the affirmative, or dread with the nega*
as, t_~r+~
desire)
^Ll (aman gltmasa)
that he go not (if
^j-~iJ ^Ul (ilman gitmasin)
!
wish prevail)
With an
that he go not (by his
!
4*
imperative,
challenge;
as,
galsin) just
let
J^4-*
(hele) expresses
(hele gal) come along
him only come
an invitation or a
!
^^JS
j^-b
(hele
!
Arabic phrases are often used as interjections, generally
-
after proper
names
;
as,
mAkerreme, kerrema-ha
which
may God, who
IjcV
1
,
^W
,,&'
jji
*JJl
'llahA
\$*
taala)
*Z
-
Z
J
-
$*=*+ (mekke-1
A*,^=U>
Mekka
the
Venerated,
be exalted, cause to be venerated
^Tzs Majesty, the
champion of
Selim Khan, the shadows of whose clemency
!
the faith,
Sultan
may God spread
over the crowns of the heads of mankind, so long as the months
repeat themselves
and
the years renew themselves
FINIS.
!
193
(
)
ADDENDUM.
IN
45, after line 5, as a further
p.
letter
j
the following rule
,
is
remark on the uses of
not without
its
In a few words of Persian origin only, the
ing a letter
is
^
,
and
class,
and
its
viz.,
;
j
follow-
,
followed by a long vowel-letter
itself
Thus (j^
suppressed and lost in the pronunciation.
y. kh'ah, JUljL
use
letter
kh'ahlsh.
The word
derivatives, Jj*\j>>
,
*J>
J^J^ji.
,
kh'aja, of this
&c.,
Persian proper, a very few words beginning with
a following
1
,
elide the
j
in like
rhyme-words of ancient poetry.
read khush in Persian, khish in
with
manner
in
never observed in Turkish, unless
have been
^J>j
vesh, for instance
^
read kh'ash.
rhyme with
jj
bed
;
and
Thus
ji.,
;
but
in the
word ^>j^ (usually
Turkish) is made to rhyme
in
the
consequence must then be
(usually khud, Turkish khid)
;
be
may
In
without
pronouncing
it
is
made
to
something after the manner of our poets,
who make wind rhyme with
,
kh'iin,
corrupted in Turkish into khoja, khojagjan, khojalfq, &c.
this is
1
find, mind, &c.
This
is
what
in Persian.
styled Jjjjw>j[j (vwfiwi ma'dule), deflected j,
is
195
(
)
INDEX.
A.
Alphabet,Semitic,Greek,and Latin,
Accidence, p. 51.
Synopsis
Active participles, 100, 105.
aorist,100
102.
future, 100, 101.
,,
Aorist tense, 100.
past, 100, 101.
perfect, 100,101.
,,
present, 100, 101.
*!j
necessitative, 108,
optative, 109.
J*
jlj
193.
,
Apposition, 160.
Arabic active participles (nomeii
Adjectival expressions, 72.
Adjectives, 61,
6874.
agentis), 59, 61, 62.
Arabic adjectival expressions, 72.
Arabic, 61, 69.
Persian, 68,
7072.
Compound,
Syntax
of,
adjectives, 61,69.
adverbs, 73.
70-2.
broken plurals, 55
168.
6264.
Adverbial expressions, 154.
Arabic diminutives,
Adverbs, Arabic, 73.
of,
182.
Numeral,
3.
Semitic, Greek, and
tin, 3.
5560.
noun of instrument and
receptacle, 60.
Affirmative verb, 92.
2.
60, 67.
irregular plurals,
Turkish, 73.
Alphabet by forms,
60.
chapters of derivation, 57,
Turkish, 68, 69, 73-4.
Syntax
conditional, 109.
indicative, 107.
,,
Active verb, 92.
Addendum on
of, 4.
Aorist active participle, 100 102.
Aorist passive participle, 103.
Arabic nouu of kind or manner,
60.
La-
place of abundance,
60.
INDEX.
19G
Arabic noun of time and place, 60.
Complex
fractional numbers, 80.
Compound Persian
unity, 60.
Arabic ordinals, 78.
passive
participle
Active, 149.
(nomen
patientis), 59, 61, 62.
Intransitive, 149.
Arabic plurals, 55.
Passive, 149.
irregular, 55
,,
Adjectives, 70.
Verbs, 148.
60.
regular, 55.
Transitive, 149.
Conditional mood, 100.
Arabic quadriliteral roots, 65.
Conjugation, 99.
Combined
regular plurals, 55.
substantives, 53, 54.
(true
Turk-
ish), 133.
,,
triliteral roots, 56.
Conjugational root, 96.
,,
verbal nouns (nomen verbi),
Conjunctions, 156.
58,61-2.
Syntax
of,
185.
Consonants, 15.
B.
Hard, 47.
Brevity, Conversational, 158.
Broken(irregular) plural, 19,55
Movent,
60.
33
32
31,
ter,
ter.
Consonants, Neutral, 48.
Quiescent, 27.
C.
Soft, 47.
Cardinal numbers, 74-7.
Conversational brevity, 158.
Categories of verbs, 99.
Complex, 99,^119,
Category First Complex, 119, 120.
"Second
119,125.
D.
5<
Simple, of verbs, 99, 1 19.
Third Complex, 119, 129.
Dates of documents,
Causal gerund-like locution, 113.
Causative verb, 93.
,,
,,
Compound,
Nouns,
51.
Personal Pronouns,
82.
(true Turkish) Conjuga-
Defective Verbs, 98.
Demonstrative Pronouns,
tion, 133.
Complex Categories of Verb,
119.
Interrogatives, 89.
'
150.
Closed syllable, 27.
Combined
&c., 81.
Declination of Demonstratives, 88.
99,
Derivation of Verbs, 92.
Determinate Verb, 93.
88.
INDEX.
197
Digits, 81.
G.
Diminutive, Arabic, 67.
Gender, 51.
Persian, 67.
General Verbal Noun, 103.
Turkish, 66, 73.
Gerund, Fifth, 112.
Directing vowels, 27.
First, 111.
Distributive numbers, 78.
Documents, Dates
Dominant
(letter
Fourth, 112.
of, 81.
Second, 111.
or vowel), 48, 49.
Seventh, 112.
Dubitative Verb, 1 11.
Compound,
Sixth, 112.
150.
Third, 112.
Gerund-like locutions, 110, 111.
Causal, 110,
Esere, 16
bis.
Etymology,
113.
51.
Gerund-like locutions of propor-
Euphony, 15,48-50.
tion, 113.
Expressions, Adjectival, 72.
Gerund-like locutions of time, 111,
Adverbial, 154.
114, 115.
Gerund-like locution of time, Fifth,
115.
First, 114.
Facile Verbs, 141.
First
Fourth, 114.
150.
Compound,
Second,114.
Complex Category of Verbs,
Sixth, 115.
>,
119, 120.
Third, 114.
First Person Plural of Verbs, 116.
Pronoun,
82.
Gerunds, 99, 110.
Syntax
Singular of Verbs, 115.
of,
181.
Pronoun, 82.
H.
Formation of the Tenses, 106.
Fractional numbers, 79.
Half, 79.
Future Active Participle, 100, 101.
Passive
,,
,
103.
Tense, Imperative, 100.
Hard
cor. sonants, 47.
vowels, 48.
Hemze,
10,
3033.
Indicative, 108.
omitted, 24.
Past, 100.
Radical, 30, 31.
Verbal Noun, 104.
Servile, 30, 31.
INDEX.
193
M.
I.
Identity of Semitic, Greek, and
Medd, 24-26.
Latin Alphabets, 3.
Imperative Mood, 100.
Months, Signs
Imperfect Tense, 100.
Mood, Conditional, 100.
for, in dates, 81.
Moods, 100.
indicative, 107.
Imperative,
Impotential Verbs, 92.
Indicative,
Compound, 150
Indefinite numerals (pronouns), 80.
Infinitive,
Necessitative,
,,
Indeterminate Verbs, 93.
Optative,
Indicative Mood, 100.
Infinitive
Mood, 100.
N.
Syntax
of,
179.
Names
Interjections, 157.
Syntax
10-14.
Necessitative Mood, 100.
191.
of,
of Letters, 1,
Negative Verbs, 92.
Interrogation, 151.
Interrogative Pronouns, 89.
97.
Neutral consonants, 48.
Intransitive Verbs, 92.
Compound,
149.
vowels, 48.
Noun
J.
Jnnctional Letters,
150.
Compound,
Neuter Verbs,
Verbs, 151.
Adjective, 68.
Arabic, 68, 69.
Persian, 68.
9.
Compound,70.
Syntax
Letters, 1
168.
Substantive, 51.
Junctional, 9.
Names
of,
Turkish, 68.
of the, 1,
Non-Junctional,
1014.
9.
,,
of prolongation, 17.
,,
of the Alphabet, 1.
Syntax
of,
161.
Verbal, 99, 103-5.
Syntax
of,
179.
Radical, 30, 31.
Numbers and persons of verbs,
Numeral Alphabet, 3.
Reduplicated, 29, 30, 32.
Numerals, 74-82.
Servile, 28, 30, 31.
Locutions, Gerund-like,
110115.
115.
Cardinal, Arabic, 74-7.
Persian, 74-7.
199
ITTDEX.
Numerals, Cardinal, Turkish, 74-6.
Past future tense, 100.
Distributive, 78.
Past future indicative, 100, 108.
Fractional, 79.
Past tense, 100.
indicative, 107.
Indefinite, 80.
Interrogative, 76.
,,
Peculiar Turkish numerals, 80.
relatives, 91.
Ordinal, Arabic, 78.
Persian, 78.
Perfect active participle, 100, 101.
Turkish, 77.
Perfect tense, 100.
Turkish Peculiar, 80.
of, 170.
Syntax
,,
indicative, 107.
,,
verbal noun, 103.
Permissive verbs, 93.
Persian adjectives, 68, 70-2.
0.
Compound, 70-2.
,,
Open
syllables, 27.
Optative Mood,
Persian diminutive, 67.
100.
Orthographic signs, 15,
2833.
letters, 2, 13.
plurals of nouns, 54.
substantives, 53, 54.
P.
Personal pronouns, 82.
Participles, 100.
Phonetic values of letters, 15,34-50.
Active, 100-105.
Aorist, 100, 102.
Phonetic values of vowels,17,48-50
Pluperfect tense, 100.
indicative, 108.
Future, 100,101.
General, 100.
Past, 100, 101.
Perfect,100,101.
Plural of nouns, Arabic irregular,
55-60.
Plural of nouns, Arabic regular, 55.
Present, 100-2.
Persian, 54.
Passive, 101, 103, 105.
Turkish, 51.
Syntax
Aorist, 103.
Possessive pronouns, 83-8.
Future, 103.
Potential verbs, 141-2.
of,
178.
Twenty-eight, 101.
Passive participles, 101, 103, 105.
verb, 92.
Compound,
Compound, 150.
Precision in writing, 158.
Prepositions, 156.
Syntax
149.
verbal adjective, 104.
Past active participle, 100, 101.
of,
184.
Present active participle, 100-2.
tense, 100.
indicative, 106.
200
INDEX.
Present tense
Signs for the months in dates, 81.
infinitive, 110.
Simple Category of Verbs, 99
verbal noun, 103.
Prolongation, Letters
Soft consonants
Pronoun, 82.
and vowels,
Indefinite (numeral), 80.
Syntax
of,
16L
Interrogative, 89.
Syllabary, No. 1 and No.
Personal, 82.
Syllables, closed
2, 17.
and open, 27.
Synopsis of Semitic, Greek and
8388.
Possessive,
48.
Substantives, 51.
Demonstrative, 88.
,,
119.
verbs, 93.
of, 17.
Latin Alphabets,
Relative, 90.
Peculiar Turkish, 91.
4.
Syntax, 158.
of adjectives, 168.
of adverbs, 182.
.
Q
derived from
Q-
j
Quiescence, sign
of conjunctions, 185.
<p
,
,
4, 8, 40.
of, 19,
of gerunds, 181.
of infinitive, 179.
28.
of interjections, 191.
of numerals, 170.
R.
of participles, 178.
Radical letters, 30, 31.
of prepositions, 184.
of pronouns, 173.
Reciprocal verbs, 93.
Compound,
150.
of substantives, 161.
Reduplicated letters, 29, 30, 32.
of verbal nouns, 179.
Reflexive verb, 98.
of verbs, 174.
Root of conjugation, 96.
tense, 106, 115.
T.
Table of verbal derivation, 94-5.
Tenses, 100, 104,
Second Complex Category of Verbs,
119, 125.
Second person
106110.
Aorist conditional, 109.
indicative, 107.
plural, 118.
necessitative, 108.
singular, 116.
optative, 109.
Formation of the, 106.
Servile letters, 28, 30, 31.
Sign of quiescence,
Future imperative, 100;
19, 28.
reduplication, 24
26,
,,
indicative, 108.
INDEX.
201
Tense, Imperfect, 100.
Y.
indicative, 107.
Values of letters,
Past, 100.
Future, 100.
Active, 92.
Affirmative, 92.
indicative, 108.
,,
1550.
92153.
Verb,
indicative, 107-
Perfect, 100.
Auxiliary, 149.
Causative, 93.
indicative, 108.
Pluperfect, 100.
Compound,
.
Combined
indicative, 108.
150.
conjugation
of,
133.
Present, 100.
indicative, 106.
infinitive, 110.
Complex Categories
.
Verb, Complex Category
Teshdid, 32.
Third Complex Category of Verbs,
119, 129.
of,
99
133.
of, First,
119, 120.
Verb, Complex Category of, Second,
Third person plural, 118.
119, 125.
Verb, Complex Category
singular, 106.
Transliteration, 15, 17, 34
47.
Third,
Verb, Compound, 148.
Turkish adjectives, 68, 69, 73-4.
Conjugation
of, 99.
Defective, 98.
adverbs, 73.
cardinal numbers, 74-6.
Determinate, 93.
Dubitative, 141.
interrogative, 76.
conjugation
of,
119, 129.
Transitive verb, 92.
(combined),
133.
Compound,
150.
Compound,
150.
Facile, 141.
Turkish ordinal numbers, 77.
n
plural of substantives, 51.
Impotential, 92.
substantives, 51.
Compound,
true combined conjugation,
150.
Indeterminate, 93.
133.
Interrogative, 151.
Intransitive, 92.
Compound,
U.
149.
Negative, 92.
Ustun, 16.
Uturu, 16.
>
>
Neuter, 97.
Compound,
150.
INDEX.
202
Verb of Existence, Non-Existence,
Verbal Nouns, Future, 104.
Presence, or Absence, 147.
General, 103.
Perfect, 103.
Verb, Passive, 92.
Compound,
Present, 103.
149.
Permissive, 93.
Syntax
Potential, 141-2.
Compound, 150.
Hard, 48.
Compound,
150.
Letters, 15, 16.
Reflexive, 98.
Long, 17,
Simple, 93.
Neutral, 48.
of,
of,
bis.
Points, 15, 16.
99-119.
Short, 16, 17.
Substantive, 144.
Syntax
179.
Directing, 27.
Reciprocal, 93.
Simple Category
of,
Vowels, 15.
Soft, 48.
174.
Transitive, 92.
Compound, 149.
,,
W.
Verbal adjective passive, 104.
Written
derivation, 92.
Table
Nouns,
99,
of,
103105.
as a vowel, 17, 23, 26, 27.
I
digits, 81.
signs for
94.
months
81.
C
57.
JWI
numeral, 4.
consonant, 23.
\
T24.
i
JU
57.
*
57.
25.
l
57.
57.
57.
16.
in dates,
INDEX.
204
INDEX.
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
UNIVERSITY OF
TORONTO LIBRARY